RU2684036C2 - Conductor arrangements for electrically powered surgical instruments with rotatable end effectors - Google Patents

Abstract

FIELD: medicine.SUBSTANCE: invention relates to medical equipment. Surgical instrument comprises conductors and a housing with an elongated shaft attached thereto. Elongated shaft is rotatable relative to the housing. Conductors provide power transmission from a source, which can be located inside or outside the housing on an associated distal section of elongated shaft assembly or surgical end effector.EFFECT: surgical instrument can further include a travel limiting arrangement for limiting the amount of rotary travel of the elongated shaft assembly relative to the housing to a predetermined range of rotary travel.17 cl, 186 dwg

Description

SCOPE OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to surgical instruments and, in various designs, to surgical dissecting and stitching brackets with power tools and cassettes used in them with brackets that are made with the possibility of cutting and stitching tissue brackets.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Surgical stapling instruments are often used to place staples in soft tissues to reduce or eliminate bleeding from soft tissues, in particular, for example, when dissecting tissue. Such surgical stapling instruments, such as, for example, an endoscopic divider, may contain an end effector that can move or pivotally rotate relative to the elongated stem assembly. End effectors are often performed with the possibility of fixing the soft tissue between the first and second branches, the first branch often includes a cartridge with brackets, made with the possibility of storing in it and extracting the brackets from it, and the second branch often includes an abutment plate. Such surgical stapling devices include a clamping system for rotating the anvil plate relative to the staple cartridge.

Surgical stapling devices, as described above, can be designed with the ability to rotate the stop element of the end effector relative to the cartridge with brackets in order to clamp soft tissue between them. In various circumstances, the anvil may be designed to apply a locking force to the soft tissue in order to firmly hold the soft tissue between the anvil and the bracket with brackets. However, if the surgeon is not satisfied with the position of the end effector, the surgeon, as a rule, must activate the release mechanism on the surgical suturing instrument to rotate the support to the open position and then change the position of the end effector. Further, the staples are usually fed from a cassette with brackets using an ejector that passes through a chute in a cassette with brackets, which causes deformation of the brackets against the thrust element and holds together the layers of soft tissue. As is known to those skilled in the art, for more secure bonding of layers of fabric, staples are often applied in several lines, or rows. The end clamp may also include a cutting tool, such as a knife, which extends between two rows of staples to excise the soft tissue after stapling the layers of soft tissue.

Such surgical stapling instruments and effectors can be made in shape and size with the ability to insert them into the body cavity through a trocar or other access hole. The end effector is usually associated with an elongated stem, the size of which allows it to pass through a trocar or hole. The elongated stem assembly is often functionally connected to a handle that supports control systems and / or triggers designed to control the operation of the end effector. In order to facilitate the correct placement and position of the end effector inside the body, many surgical instruments are designed to facilitate the hinge rotation of the end effector relative to the portion of the elongated stem.

Power-operated surgical instruments are described in US Patent Application Publication No. US 2009/0090763 A1, entitled “SURGICAL STAPLE WITH ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY”, Zemlok et al. (hereinafter referred to as Zemlok 63 763), the full description of which is incorporated herein by reference. Power-operated surgical instruments are also described in US Patent Application Publication No. US 2011/0278344 A1, entitled "SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH POWER SUPPLY", Zemlok et al. (hereinafter referred to as Zemlok ‘344), is currently US Patent No. 8,201,721, a full description of which is incorporated herein by reference.

The above description is intended only to illustrate various aspects of the relevant technology in the field of application of the invention at the present time, and it should not be construed as limiting the scope of the claims.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES

The features and advantages of the present invention, as well as the way to achieve them, will become more obvious, and the invention itself will become more understandable after reading the following description of embodiments of the invention in combination with the accompanying drawings, and:

In FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument using a single form of retract design.

In FIG. 2 is a perspective view of an exemplary boot block that can be used with connections to the various surgical instruments described herein.

In FIG. 3 shows a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the section of the boot block shown in FIG. 2

In FIG. 4 shows a top view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. one.

In FIG. 5 is a partial side view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 4, with the clutch in the disengaged position.

In FIG. 6 shows a top view of an embodiment of a portion of the retractor assembly and the design of its retractable lever.

In FIG. 7 shows a partial view with a spatial separation of the components of one form of a drive unit, portions of which are shown in cross section.

In FIG. 8 shows another top view of a portion of a surgical instrument with a locking system of a drive unit in a locked position.

In FIG. 9 is a top view of one form of the blocking dog assembly.

In FIG. 10 shows a side view in vertical projection of the blocking pawl assembly shown in FIG. 9.

In FIG. 11 is a bottom view of the blocking dog assembly shown in FIG. 9 and 10.

In FIG. 12 is a front view of an embodiment of a gear housing.

In FIG. 13 is a partial side cross-sectional view of an embodiment of a surgical instrument, portions of which are shown in cross-section and with the locking system of the drive unit in the locked position.

In FIG. 14 shows another partial side view in cross section of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 13, with the locking system of the drive unit being in the unlocked position.

In FIG. 15 is a top view of another embodiment of a surgical instrument with a remote portion of the body for demonstrating a portion of the design of the locking system of the drive unit of the instrument.

In FIG. 16 is a partial side cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 15, and its sections are shown in cross section, the solid lines show the locking system of the drive unit in the locked position, and the dashed lines show the locking system of the drive unit in the unlocked position.

In FIG. 17 is another partial top view of an embodiment of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 15 and 16, with the solid lines showing the position of the pull lever prior to activation, and the dotted lines showing the position of the pull lever after initial activation.

In FIG. 18 shows another partial top view of an embodiment of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 15-17, with the dotted lines showing the pull lever in the fully activated position.

In FIG. 19 shows a partial top view of a portion of another embodiment of a surgical instrument in which the body portion is omitted to demonstrate the locking system of the drive unit of the instrument, with the solid lines showing the pull lever in the unused position, and the dotted lines showing the pull lever after initial activation.

In FIG. 20 is a partial plan view of another embodiment of a surgical instrument, with the body portion omitted to demonstrate its locking system of the drive unit in the locked position.

In FIG. 21 is another partial top view of an embodiment of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 20, and the locking system of the drive unit is in the unlocked position.

In FIG. 22 is a partial side view in cross section of a portion of a surgical instrument and an end effector, with its retractor assembly being in the non-activated position.

In FIG. 23 shows another partial side view in cross section of a surgical instrument and an end effector shown in FIG. 22, after starting the starting rod assembly.

In FIG. 24 shows another partial side view in cross section of a surgical instrument and an end effector shown in FIG. 23, after activating the retractor unit to retract the drive rod back to its original position inside the end effector.

 In FIG. 25 shows a partial side view in cross section of a portion of another surgical instrument and an end effector in a state before launch, with its retractor unit being in an inactive position.

In FIG. 26 shows another partial side view in cross section of a surgical instrument and an end effector shown in FIG. 25, after launch.

In FIG. 27 shows another partial side view in cross section of a surgical instrument and an end effector shown in FIG. 26, with the latch of its retractor assembly being in the unlocked position.

In FIG. 28 shows another partial side view in cross section of a surgical instrument and an end effector shown in FIG. 27, with the distal portion of the starting rod being in the retracted position.

In FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of another embodiment of a surgical instrument, with its actuator connector assembly being in the hinge position.

In FIG. 30 is a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of an embodiment of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 29, with its drive connector assembly in the start position.

In FIG. 31 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the drive connector assembly of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 29 and 30, with the solid lines showing the element of the selector connector in the pivotal position, and the dotted lines showing the element of the connector of the selector in the start position.

In FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of a portion of another embodiment of a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 33 is an enlarged partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 32.

In FIG. 34 shows another enlarged partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 32 and 33, and its movement limiter is in the distal position itself.

In FIG. 35 shows another enlarged partial cross-sectional view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 32-34, and its movement limiter is in the most proximal position.

In FIG. 36 is a partial cross-sectional view of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 33, along line 36-36 shown in FIG. 33.

In FIG. 37 is a partial perspective view of a portion of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 32-36.

In FIG. 38 is a partial perspective view of the barrel of a surgical instrument, cuff and disposable boot block, not attached to the barrel, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 39 is a partial perspective view of the barrel, cuff and disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit attached to a barrel.

In FIG. 40 presents a partial perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the trunk, cuff and disposable boot block shown in FIG. 38

In FIG. 41 presents another partial perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the trunk, cuff and disposable boot block depicted in FIG. 38

In FIG. 42 is a perspective view of the distal attachment portion of the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 38

In FIG. 43 is another perspective view of the distal attachment portion of the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 38

In FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the proximal attachment portion of the barrel shown in FIG. 38

In FIG. 45 is another perspective view of the proximal attachment portion of the barrel shown in FIG. 38

In FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the cuff and the starting barrel of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 38

In FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional view in perspective of the disposable loading unit, cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit attached to a barrel.

In FIG. 48 shows a partial view in vertical projection in cross section of a disposable boot block, cuff and barrel, shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit not attached to the barrel.

In FIG. 49 shows a partial view in vertical projection in cross section of a disposable loading unit, cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit attached to a barrel.

In FIG. 50 is a vertical elevation view of the cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, along the plane shown in FIG. 48.

In FIG. 51 is a partial cross-sectional view in perspective of the disposable loading unit, cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit that is not attached to the barrel, and additionally shows the cuff in the initial position relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view in perspective of the disposable loading unit, cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit that is not attached to the barrel, and additionally shows the cuff in the initial position relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 53 is a partial cross-sectional view in perspective of the disposable loading unit, cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit included in the barrel, and additionally shows the cuff in the initial position relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 54 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the disposable loading unit, cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit included in the barrel, and additionally shows the cuff in a second position, rotated relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 55 shows a partial cross-sectional view in perspective of the disposable loading unit, cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit included in the barrel, and additionally shows the cuff in a second position, rotated relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 56 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the disposable loading unit, cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit fully inserted into the barrel, and additionally shows the cuff in a second position, rotated relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 57 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the disposable loading unit, cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit fully inserted into the barrel, and additionally shows the cuff in the initial position relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 58 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the disposable loading unit, cuff and barrel shown in FIG. 38, which shows a disposable loading unit fully inserted into the barrel, and additionally shows the cuff in the initial position relative to the barrel.

In FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the barrel of a surgical instrument and a disposable loading unit not attached to the barrel, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 60 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the barrel and the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 59, which shows a disposable loading unit partially inserted into the barrel, and additionally shows the latch in an unlocked position.

In FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the barrel and the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 59, which shows a disposable boot block fully inserted into the barrel, and additionally shows the latch in the locked position.

In FIG. 62 shows a partial view in vertical projection in the cross section of the barrel and the disposable loading unit shown in FIG. 59, which shows a disposable boot block fully inserted into the barrel, and additionally shows the latch in the locked position.

In FIG. 63 is a schematic representation of a torque versus voltage curve in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 64 (a) is a schematic representation of high duty cycle pulses transmitted by a pulse width modulation scheme in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 64 (b) is a schematic representation of low duty cycle pulses transmitted by a pulse width modulation scheme in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 65 (a) is a schematic representation of a trigger element driven by pulses with a high fill factor of the pulse-width modulation circuit shown in FIG. 64 (a).

In FIG. 65 (b) is a schematic of a trigger element driven by pulses with a low fill factor of the pulse-width modulation circuit shown in FIG. 64 (b).

In FIG. 66 (a) -66 (c) are schematic representations of pulse width modulation schemes having a primary set of coils and a secondary set of coils, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 67 is a graph showing the speed and torque throughout the starting stroke, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 68 is a graph showing a speed limit segment of a test during a starting course, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 69 and 70 are schematic diagrams of a simplified stepper motor in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 71-73 are schematic representations of a hybrid stepper motor in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 74 (a) -74 (c) are schematic representations of the hybrid stepper motor shown in FIG. 71-73, showing a change in polarities.

In FIG. 75 is a perspective view of a screen, which is a touch screen for use with an endoscope, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 76 is a view in elevation of the first information layer for display on the screen shown in FIG. 75, with the first information layer including feedback in the form of a video image of a disposable loading unit (OZB) attached to a surgical instrument, seen with an endoscope.

In FIG. 77 is a vertical projection view of the second information layer for display on the screen shown in FIG. 75, wherein the second information layer includes a control panel for receiving an input signal via a touch screen.

In FIG. 78 is a vertical projection of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76.

In FIG. 79 is a view in elevation of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes digital data relating to the advancement of the scalpel, and a visual representation of the advancement of the scalpel when the scalpel is close to the start of the starting stroke.

In FIG. 80 is a vertical projection view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes digital data relating to the advancement of the scalpel and a visual representation of the advancement of the scalpel when the scalpel is close to the distal end of the starting stroke.

In FIG. 81 is a vertical projection view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes a symbolic representation of a scalpel superimposed on the detected position of the scalpel in the AGR shown in the first information layer.

In FIG. 82 is a vertical projection view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes a graphical representation of the speed of a scalpel moving distally during the launch stroke.

In FIG. 83 is a view in elevation of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes a graphical representation of the clamping force exerted by the AHB branches on the fabric along the length of the AHB branch.

In FIG. 84 is a vertical projection view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes digital data related to the position of the AHD, and the AHB shown on the first informational layer is not in the hinge position.

In FIG. 85 is a vertical elevation view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, with the second information layer including digital data relating to the position of the AHB and a visual representation of the position of the AHB, while the AHB shown on the first informational layer is in the hinge-turning position.

In FIG. 86 is a vertical projection view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, showing user input for adjusting the hinge rotation of the ESB via the touch screen shown in FIG. 75

In FIG. 87 is a vertical projection view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, showing a schematic diagram of the control of the ACP and further showing data input from the user for adjusting the pivotal rotation of the PSA by controlling the circuit via the touch screen shown in FIG. 75

In FIG. 88 is a vertical projection of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, showing the CRO at the hinge position on the first information layer in response to user input shown in FIG. 86 and 87.

 In FIG. 89 is a vertical projection view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, showing user input for controlling the closure of a jaw configured to move, via the touch screen shown in FIG. 75

In FIG. 90 shows a view in vertical projection of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, showing the branch of the PSA, made with the possibility of movement, in the clamped position on the first information layer in response to user input, which is shown in FIG. 89

In FIG. 91 is a vertical projection view of the controller interface for the second information layer shown in FIG. 77.

In FIG. 92 is a vertical projection view of the second information layer shown in FIG. 77, overlaid on the first information layer shown in FIG. 76, wherein the second information layer includes the controller interface shown in FIG. 91, and a line of promotion.

In FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram showing the communication system for the feedback controller and the endoscope, the surgical instrument and the screen shown in FIG. 75

In FIG. 94 is an exploded view of the components of a surgical instrument system, including a handle and an end effector, including a plurality of indicators in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 95 is a partial elevational view of the handle of a surgical instrument system including a plurality of indicators in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 96 is a partial cross-sectional view of the handle of a surgical instrument system, including a trigger guard in accordance with at least one embodiment, with the trigger guard shown in an unlocked state.

In FIG. 97 is a partial cross-sectional view of the handle shown in FIG. 96, showing the trigger fuse in the locked state.

In FIG. 98 is a cross-sectional view of the safety of the trigger shown in FIG. 96, showing the trigger fuse in its unlocked state.

In FIG. 99 is a cross-sectional view of the safety of the trigger shown in FIG. 96, showing the trigger fuse in its locked state.

In FIG. 99A is a flowchart describing the operating program of a surgical instrument controller to assess whether a surgical instrument has been exposed to a temperature above its threshold temperature and to determine how to notify the surgical instrument user that the temperature threshold has been exceeded.

In FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view of a handle of a surgical instrument system including a trigger safety device in a locked state, in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 101 is a detailed cross-sectional view of the handle shown in FIG. 100, showing the trigger fuse in its locked state.

In FIG. 102 is another cross sectional view of the handle shown in FIG. 100, showing the trigger fuse in the unlocked state.

In FIG. 103 is a perspective view of the trigger guard shown in FIG. 100, which is shown in its locked state.

In FIG. 104 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a handle of a surgical instrument, including a trigger safety device in a locked state, in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 105 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of the handle shown in FIG. 104, which is shown in the unlocked state.

In FIG. 106 is a partial left side view in cross section of the handle shown in FIG. 104, which is shown in its locked state.

In FIG. 107 is a partial right side view in cross section of the handle shown in FIG. 104, which is shown in its locked state.

In FIG. 108 is a partial left side view in cross section of the handle shown in FIG. 104, which is shown in its unlocked state.

In FIG. 109 shows a partial right side view in cross section of the handle shown in FIG. 104, which is shown in its unlocked state.

In FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the steps that a surgical instrument controller can use to process a signal received from an end effector attached to a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 110A is a schematic representation of an array of parameters that can be transmitted from the end effector to the surgical instrument.

In FIG. 111 is a process diagram showing the steps for using the end effector and the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 110.

In FIG. 112 is a schematic illustration of a mutual connection between the end effector and the barrel of a surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 113 is a view in plan view of a printed circuit board of the interconnection shown in FIG. 112

In FIG. 114 is a partial perspective view of an end effector of a surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 115 is a partial perspective view of the end effector shown in FIG. 114, and the barrel of a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view of the end effector shown in FIG. 114 attached to the barrel shown in FIG. 115

In FIG. 117 is a cross-sectional view of a mutual connection between the end effector and the barrel in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 118 is a cross-sectional view of a mutual connection between the end effector and the barrel in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of a mutual coupling between the end effector and the barrel in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 120 is a detailed view of the interconnection shown in FIG. 119.

In FIG. 121 is a side view of an end effector comprising a stop and an indicator of the position of the stop in accordance with at least one embodiment in which the stop is shown in the open position.

In FIG. 122 is a side view of the end effector shown in FIG. 121, where the stop is shown in a partially closed position.

In FIG. 123 is another side view of the end effector shown in FIG. 121, where the stop is shown in a partially closed position.

In FIG. 124 is another side view of the end effector shown in FIG. 121, where the stop is shown in a partially closed position.

In FIG. 125 is a detailed view of the indicator of the position of the stop shown in FIG. 121, on which the stop is shown in the position shown in FIG. 121.

In FIG. 126 is a detailed view of the position indicator of the stop shown in FIG. 121, on which the stop is shown in the position shown in FIG. 122.

In FIG. 127 is a detailed view of the indicator of the position of the stop shown in FIG. 121, on which the stop is shown in the position shown in FIG. 123.

In FIG. 128 is a detailed view of the indicator of the position of the stop shown in FIG. 121, on which the stop is shown in the position shown in FIG. 124.

In FIG. 129 shows a side view in cross section of a surgical instrument in accordance with some embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 130 shows a power supply system for supplying power to the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 129, and the power supply system is in conjunction with the control system of the surgical instrument shown in FIG. 129.

In FIG. 131 shows the battery of the power supply system shown in FIG. 130, connected to the base of the charger.

In FIG. 132 shows a power management circuit of the power supply system shown in FIG. 130.

In FIG. 133 is a schematic block diagram showing the operating parameters of the power supply system shown in FIG. 130.

In FIG. 134 is a perspective view of a power source of a surgical instrument in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 135 is a perspective view of the power source shown in FIG. 134, disassembled in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 136 is a circuit diagram of the power supply circuit shown in FIG. 134, including an intact rupture site in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 137 is a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in FIG. 136, with a gap in the ruptured area in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 138 is a block diagram of a system for protecting data stored in memory from unauthorized access in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the power supply of the surgical instrument, including the lid-enclosed data access portal.

In FIG. 140 presents the data access portal depicted in FIG. 139, in an unclosed configuration.

In FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the power source of the surgical instrument, including the internal data access portal.

In FIG. 142 is a block diagram of a system for protecting data stored in memory from unauthorized access in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 143 is a perspective view of a power source of a surgical instrument in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the power source shown in FIG. 143 associated with a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 145 shows the LEDs of the power source shown in FIG. 143, in different configurations in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 146 is a side view of a surgical instrument, including a housing, in accordance with various embodiments described herein.

In FIG. 147 is a side view of the housing shown in FIG. 146, wherein the outer shell is removed to demonstrate detachable components attached to the case with fasteners.

In FIG. 148 is a side view of the housing shown in FIG. 147, with the detachable components removed from the housing.

In FIG. 149 is a schematic of the detectable recesses, cuts or indentations of a bar code formed on the surface of the end effector.

In FIG. 150 is a schematic representation of an example of a bar code used with a bar code reader.

In FIG. 151 is a partial side view of the trunk effector, including a bar code, in accordance with at least one embodiment.

FIG. 152 is a partial elevational view of the end effector of a surgical instrument, including a bar code, in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 153 is a partial perspective view of the handle of a surgical instrument, including a bar code reader, in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the bar code reader shown in FIG. 153, with an end effector located on it.

In FIG. 155 is a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the end effector and the barrel of a surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 156 shows a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the end effector and the barrel of a surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment, the end effector contains portions of the trigger element, blocked together with the possibility of release.

In FIG. 157 is a partial perspective view of portions of the trigger element shown in FIG. 156, locked together with a locking element.

In FIG. 158 is a partial perspective view of the portions of the starting element and the locking element shown in FIG. 156, wherein the portion of the trigger element is removed to show the locking element, blocking together the areas of the trigger element with the possibility of release.

In FIG. 159 is an exploded view of the components of the trigger element shown in FIG. 156, and the actuator release, made with the possibility of moving the locking element in the unlocked state and release sections of the starting element.

In FIG. 160 presents a partial view with a spatial separation of the components of the mutual connection between the actuating mechanism of the release depicted in FIG. 159, and the corresponding actuator release of the trunk.

In FIG. 161 is a cross-sectional view of the interconnection shown in FIG. 160

In FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of a component comprising an engine, a drive shaft and a slip clutch, configured to selectively transfer a turn between the engine and the drive shaft.

In FIG. 163 is a sectional view of the assembly shown in FIG. 162.

In FIG. 164 is a perspective view of the bias of the slip clutch shown in FIG. 162.

In FIG. 165 is a cross-sectional view of the assembly shown in FIG. 162, showing the friction element of the slip clutch in the neutral position.

In FIG. 166 is a cross-sectional view of the assembly shown in FIG. 162, showing the friction element shown in FIG. 165, in the forward position.

In FIG. 167 is a cross-sectional view of the assembly shown in FIG. 162, showing the friction element shown in FIG. 165, in reverse position.

In FIG. 168 is a perspective view of an engine and a gear assembly in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 169 is a perspective view of an engine, a gear assembly, and an audible feedback generator in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 170 is a vertical elevation view of the tooth on the disk of the gear assembly shown in FIG. 169, and the disc rotates in a clockwise direction, and the prong engages with the clicker of the audible feedback generator shown in FIG. 169, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 171 is a vertical elevation view of the tooth on the disk of the gear assembly shown in FIG. 169, and the disk rotates in a counterclockwise direction, and the tooth engages with the clicker of the audible feedback generator shown in FIG. 169, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 172 is a perspective view of an engine, a gear assembly having multiple disks, and an audible feedback generator in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 173 is a graphical depiction of feedback generated near the end of the starting stroke by the audible feedback generator shown in FIG. 172, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 174 and 175 are graphic representations of the feedback generated around the hinge rotation limit of the boot block by the sound feedback generator shown in FIG. 172, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 176 is a schematic representation of a surgical instrument operation algorithm.

In FIG. 177 is another schematic representation of the surgical instrument operation algorithm.

In FIG. 178 presents a schematic representation of the operation of a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 179 is a circuit configured to indicate battery voltage.

In FIG. 180 is a schematic representation of a flashing signal, configured to indicate the charged state of the battery.

In FIG. 181 is a schematic representation of a diagnostic test when using a surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 182 is a schematic diagram of a discharged battery and a power outage when the battery is below the minimum charge level.

In FIG. 183 is a table of information that can be stored, in which the operating and / or performance characteristics of the battery are recorded.

In FIG. 184 is a schematic diagram of a battery diagnostic circuit.

In FIG. 185 is a perspective view of a sealed engine and gear assembly for use with a surgical instrument in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

In FIG. 186 shows a view in vertical projection in cross section with a spatial separation of the components of the sealed engine and gear assembly, shown in FIG. 185, in accordance with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The applicant of this application also owns the following patent applications filed on the same day, each of which is fully incorporated herein by reference:

- U.S. patent application entitled “DEVICES FOR PULLING THE PULSE ELEMENT FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH POWER SUPPLY”, file of patent attorney No. END7293USNP / 130016;

- U.S. Patent Application entitled “DESIGNS OF AUXILIARY BATTERIES FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH POWER SUPPLY”, file of patent attorney No. END7294USNP / 130017;

- US patent application entitled “CONSTRUCTIONS FOR DETECTING ERRORS FOR NODES OF SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, file of patent attorney No. END7295USNP / 130018;

- U.S. Patent Application entitled “FIXING PLOTS FOR NODES OF SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, file of patent attorney No. END7296USNP / 130019;

- US patent application entitled "CHAIN FOR PROTECTION AGAINST UNAUTHORIZED APPLICATION OF ACCUMULATOR BATTERY SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS", file of patent attorney No. END7297USNP / 130020;

- US patent application entitled “CLOSING INDICATOR SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, file of patent attorney No. END7298USNP / 130021;

- U.S. patent application entitled “TORQUE OPTIMIZATION FOR SURGICAL TOOLS”, file of patent attorney No. END7299USNP / 130022;

- U.S. patent application entitled “CONSTRUCTION FOR HOLDING THE PROTECTIVE COVER FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS PERFORMED WITH THE OPPORTUNITY OF STERILIZATION”, file of patent attorney No. END7300USNP / 130023;

- U.S. Patent Application entitled “END EFFECTOR DETECTION SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, Patent Attorney No. END7302USNP / 130025;

- U.S. patent application entitled “DESIGN FOR LOCKING THE STARTING HOOK FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS”, filed by patent attorney No. END7303USNP / 130026;

- U.S. Patent Application entitled "INTERACTIVE SCREENS", Patent Attorney No. END7304USNP / 130027; and

- U.S. Patent Application entitled "ELECTRIC DRIVEN SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, PERFORMED WITH THE POSSIBILITY OF A HINGE," patent attorney No. END7305USNP / 130028.

To ensure a complete understanding of the principles of operation, design, operation, production and use of the devices and methods described in this document, some embodiments are described. One or more examples of these embodiments are shown in the accompanying drawings. Those of ordinary skill in the art will understand that the devices and methods specifically described herein and illustrated in the accompanying drawings are non-limiting examples of implementation, and that the scope of the various embodiments of the present invention is defined only by the claims. The features shown or described in connection with one embodiment may be combined with those of other embodiments. The scope of the present invention is intended to include such modifications and variations.

The terms "contain" (and any of its forms, such as "contains" and "containing"), "have" (and any of its forms, such as "has" and "having"), "include" (and any of its forms, such as "includes" and "inclusive"), "contain" (and any of its forms, such as "contains" and "containing") are unlimited connecting verbs. As a result, a surgical system or device that “contains”, “has”, “includes” or “contains” one or more elements has this one or more elements, but possession is not limited to only one or more elements. Similarly, an element of a system or device that "contains", "has", "includes" or "contains" one or more elements has one or more elements, but possession is not limited to only one or more elements.

The terms "proximal" and "distal" in this document are defined relative to the physician controlling the handle of the surgical instrument. The term "proximal" refers to the part that lies closer to the doctor, and the term "distal" refers to the part that is remote from the doctor. It is also proposed to use in this document spatial terms such as "vertical", "horizontal", "up" and "down" for convenience and clarity in relation to the figures. However, since the use of surgical instruments involves many orientations and positions, these terms should not be interpreted as limiting and (or) absolute.

During laparoscopic manipulations and surgical operations with minimal intervention, various typical devices and methods are used. However, specialists in this field will be able to appreciate the various methods and devices described in this document, which can be used in numerous surgical procedures and applications, including, for example, those associated with open surgical procedures. Continuing familiarization with this detailed description, specialists in this field will also be able to appreciate that the various tools described in this document can be inserted into the patient's body in any way, for example, through a natural opening, through an incision or puncture in a tissue, etc. Working areas or sections of the end effector of the instruments can be entered directly into the patient’s body or can be entered through an access device equipped with a working channel through which the end effector can move and extend enny barrel of a surgical instrument.

In FIG. 1 shows a power supply surgical instrument 10, which may be similar in many respects to those surgical instruments (including their various elements, components and subcomponents), which are described, for example, in Zemlok '763 and / or Zemlok' 344, each of which is fully included. in this document by reference. Surgical instrument 10 shown in FIG. 1 includes a body 12, which has a handle portion 14 to facilitate manual manipulation and operation of the tool. Thus, the term "body" as used herein may encompass a manual or other structure configured to be manually operated. However, the term “body” may also encompass areas of an automated surgical instrument system, such as a robotic system, which is not intended for manual use, but is controlled in a different way and adapted to be activated by various components, sections and / or actuators of the system.

The node 16 of the elongated stem in the form of an endoscopic area protrudes from the housing 12 and is configured to operatively attach a surgical end effector designed to perform at least one surgical intervention in response to the application of trigger motions to it. Such surgical end effectors may be, for example, endoscopic cutting tools, clamps, or other devices that may include a pair of branches, one branch configured to selectively move relative to the other branch, or in some other configurations both branches are moveable relative to each other. As an additional example, a surgical end effector may be a device made with the possibility of cutting and stitching tissue with brackets, such as “boot block” 20, as shown in FIG. 2 and 3. Surgical end effectors, such as, for example, the loading unit 20, can be attached with the possibility of release to the node 16 of the elongated trunk of the surgical instrument 10 with power supply, as described in more detail in this document.

In FIG. 2 and 3 show one example of the shape of the boot block 20, which can be used with a surgical instrument 10. Such a boot block 20 may be similar to the boot blocks described in the aforementioned publications of US patent applications, each of which is fully incorporated herein by reference, and also the boot blocks described, for example, in the publication of US Patent Application No. US 2012-0298719-A1, entitled "SURGICAL LINING TOOLS WITH ROTATING STRUCTURES FOR LOCATING STAINTS", a full description of which includes This document is incorporated by reference.

As shown in FIG. 2, the boot unit 20 includes a stop unit 22, which is supported with a rotatable movement relative to the carrier 24, which functionally fixes in it a cartridge 26 with brackets. The assembly 28 is rotatably connected with the carrier 24 of the cassette to form a hinge joint 27, which allows the carrier 24 to rotate around the axis AA-AA of the hinge rotation located transversely to the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool. As shown in FIG. 3, assembly 28 may include, for example, upper and lower mounting portions 30 and 32. Each mounting portion 30, 32 may include a threaded bore 34 on each side having appropriate dimensions for receiving threaded bolts (not shown) for fixing on it the proximal end of the carrier 24. A pair of centrally located rotatable members 36 can extend between the upper and lower mounting portions by means of a pair of connecting members 38 which engage with the distal end of the body portion 40. Each of the connecting elements 38 may include a blocking proximal portion 39, which is adapted to be received in the grooves 42 formed at the proximal end of the body portion 40 to hold the assembly 30 and the body portion 40 in a longitudinally fixed position.

As further shown in FIG. 3, the housing section 40 of the loading unit 20 may include the upper half of the housing 44 and the lower half of the housing 46, each of which is adapted to be received inside the outer casing 50. The proximal end of the housing half 44 may include protrusions 48 for engagement to to engage with the possibility of release with the distal end of the node 16 of the elongated shaft. The protrusions 48 may, for example, form a bayonet-type connection with the distal end of the elongated stem assembly 16. Various binding structures are described in more detail in this document. The housing halves 44, 46 can form a channel 47 for receiving with the possibility of sliding a driving rod 60, which is adapted to move in the axial direction. The second swivel 70 may be sized to fit slidably within the groove 72 formed between the housing halves 44, 46. A pair of anti-protrusion plates 74 may be located adjacent to the distal end of the body portion 40, adjacent to the distal end of the axial drive rod 60 to prevent the drive rod 60 from protruding outward during the hinge rotation of the carrier 24.

The drive rod 60 may include a distal working head 62 and a proximal engagement portion 64. The drive rod 60 may be constructed from a single sheet of material or preferably from a plurality of stacked sheets. The engagement part 64 may include a pair of engagement fingers that are dimensioned and configured for assembly engagement with a pair of corresponding holding grooves formed in the drive member 66. The drive member 66 may include a proximal hole 67, which is adapted to receive the distal end of the trigger rod when the proximal end of the loading unit 20 engages with the node of the elongated barrel of the surgical instrument 10. The distal working head 62 may have an incision formed on it tissue-stretching section 63. The distal operating head 62 may additionally include a pair of pins 65 adapted to engage with the stop assembly 22 in order to turn it to a closed position to clamp the tissue between the support 22 and the bracket brace 26 when the distal working rolls head 62 in motion distally through a cassette 26 with brackets. The tissue cutting section 63 on the distal working head 62 serves to cut the clamped fabric when the surgical brackets (not shown) fixed in the cassette 26 with the brackets are brought into forming contact with the stop 22. For example, the distal working head 62 is adapted to enter meshing in the axial direction and extending the slide (not shown), fixed with the possibility of movement in the cassette 26 with brackets. When driving the carriage in the distal direction, the driving element 66 has a carriage in contact with pushers (not shown) that are connected to the brackets and act on the pushers in such a way that they push the brackets out of the cassette 26 into formative engagement with the stop 22 on the loading unit 20 .

As shown in FIG. 1, the surgical instrument 10 includes the engine 100, which is configured to generate rotational starting movements that can be used, for example, to apply starting movements to the loading unit 20, as will be described in more detail below. For example, in at least one form, the engine 100 is configured to apply rotational starting movements to the node of the starting element, essentially designated as element 82. For example, in one design, node 82 of the starting element includes a drive tube 102 rotatably mounted inside the housing 12 and having an internal thread formed therein (not shown). The proximal threaded portion of the trigger rod 104 is secured in threaded engagement with the drive tube 102 so that the rotation of the drive tube 102 causes axial movement of the trigger rod 104. The trigger rod 104 can be made with the possibility of threaded interaction with the inner part of the drive rod 60 in the loading unit 20. As described in more detail in the aforementioned Zemlok '763 and Zemlok' 344 publication, incorporated herein, turning the casing 102 in the first direction (for example, counterclockwise) causes the trigger rod 104 to extend the drive element 60 in the distal direction. The initial extension of the drive element 60 in the distal direction within the loading unit 20 causes the stop 22 to rotate to the cartridge with the brackets 26. The stop 22 is activated by pins 65 on the drive element 60, which serve to retract the stop 22 to the closed position when the drive element 60 is initially set in motion in the distal direction DD. Additional distal translational movement of the starting rod 104 and, ultimately, the drive element 60 through the boot block 20 causes the brackets to be brought into formative contact with the forming bracket by the bottom surface of the stop 22.

As further shown in FIG. 1, the surgical instrument 10 may include a swivel system, essentially referred to as element 109. However, the surgical instrument 10 may include various other designs of the swivel system described in detail in this document. In at least one form, the swivel system 109 may include a swivel mechanism 110 that includes a swivel motor 112 and a knob 114 for manually controlling the swivel joint. The swivel engine 112 can be activated by a swivel switch 116 with power supply or by turning the knob 114 to manually control the swivel joint. The activation of the swivel engine 112 serves to rotate the toothed wheel 118 of the swivel joint of the swivel mechanism 110. Activation of the swivel mechanism 110 may cause the end effector (for example, the cassette / stop portion of the loading unit 20) to move from its first position, in which its axis is substantially aligned with the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool, node 16 of the elongated shaft, to where the axis of the end effector is located at an angle to the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool, the node of the elongated stem, for example, about the axis AA-AA of the articulated joint. Further descriptions of various aspects of the swivel mechanism 110 can be found in Zemlok ‘763, which was previously fully incorporated into this document by reference. In addition, US Patent No. 7,431,188, entitled "SURGICAL STAPLING DEVICE WITH POWER SUPPLY HINGED CONNECTION", the full description of which is incorporated herein by reference, describes the end effectors with electrically driven, designed to pivot the hinge part, which can be used, which can be used by the heading, which can be used for this purpose. tool 10.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the surgical instrument may include at least one engine that can apply the starting movement to the boot block 20 and / or the movement of the hinge rotation to the system 109 swivel, as described in more detail in other sections of this document. The engine 100 may, for example, be provided with power from a power source 200 of the type described in more detail in Zemlok 763. For example, the power supply 200 may contain a rechargeable battery (for example, based on lead, based on nickel, based on lithium ions, etc.). It is also assumed that the power supply 200 may include at least one disposable battery. The voltage of a disposable battery may, for example, be in the range of from about 9 volts to about 30 volts. However, other power supplies may be used. In FIG. 1 shows one example in which the power supply 200 includes a plurality of battery cells 202. The number of cells used 202 battery may depend on the needs of the current load tool 10.

In some embodiments, the implementation of the surgical instrument 10 may include an auxiliary power source for supplying power to at least one motor of the surgical instrument 10. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, the surgical instrument 10 may include a power supply system 2000, which may be configured to provide energy for the operation of the surgical instrument 10. The power supply system 2000, as shown in FIG. 129, may be placed, for example, in the area 14 of the handle of the housing 12, and it may include a main power supply source 2002 and an auxiliary or backup power supply source 2004. The main power supply source 2002 may be configured to provide energy for operation of the surgical instrument 10 during normal operation, and the auxiliary power supply source 2004 may be configured to provide power for the operation of the surgical instrument 10 at least with limited power when the main power supply source 2002 to provide energy for operation of the surgical instrument 10, for example, when the main power supply source 2002 is depleted and / or disconnected from the surgical instrument 10. For example, the auxiliary power supply 2002 may be configured to provide energy for restoring the surgical instrument 10 to the default state in the event of depletion and / or disconnection of the main power supply 2002 from the surgical instrument 10 during a surgical procedure.

As shown in FIG. 1 and described in more detail in other sections of this document, a power source, such as, for example, power supply 200, may supply power for operating a surgical instrument 10. For example, power supply 200 may supply power to a motor, such as, for example, motor 100 , in order to cause the rotation of the casing tube 102 in the first direction and, ultimately, the axial extension of the starting rod 104, which drives the driving rod 60 distally through the loading unit 20. Alternati but the power supply 200 can supply power to the engine 100 to cause the drive tube 102 to rotate in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and ultimately axially pull in the starting rod 104, which can move the drive bar 60 proximally to its original position and / or to the default position. Similarly, the main power supply 2002 can be configured to provide power to the engine 100 to extend and / or retract the trigger rod 104 during normal operation of the surgical instrument 10. Furthermore, the auxiliary power supply 2004 can be configured to provide the power needed to retract the trigger rod 104 to the default position, if the main power supply 2002 cannot provide the necessary power supply, for example, during depletion and / or lack union main power source 2002 of the surgical instrument 10.

In addition to the above, as described in more detail in other sections of this document, surgical instrument 10 can be configured to record and store various information regarding the operation of surgical instrument 10 during a surgical procedure, such as, for example, the hinge angle of an end effector (see FIG. 2), the activation state of the end effector 20, sensor readings, the number of starts, the thickness of the fabric and / or the position of the trigger rod 104. In some examples, such information tion can be recorded and stored in volatile or temporary memory such as, for example, block random access memory (RAM), and for maintaining and storing information therein may be required power. During normal operation of the surgical instrument 10, the main power supply 2002, similar to other power supplies, described in more detail in other sections of this document, can supply the power needed to maintain and store information inside the volatile or temporary memory blocks of the surgical instrument 10. In addition, an auxiliary the power supply source 2004 may supply the power supply necessary to temporarily maintain the stored information, in the event that hydrochloric power source 2002 can not feed the necessary power, such as low and / or disconnecting the main power source 2002 of the surgical instrument 10.

In some aspects, the surgical instrument 10 may include a control system 2005 of this type and design as described in Zemlok ‘763, which has been fully incorporated into this document by reference. In this publication, you can find additional details regarding the design and operation of such a 2005 control system. For example, the control system 2005 may be configured to generate or provide information to the user, such as a warning or tool status information, via a user interface, such as a visual or sound display. The signals or input signals generated by the control system 2005 may, for example, be generated in response to other signals or input signals provided by the user, components of the instrument, or they may depend on one or more measurements associated with the instrument 10. During normal operation of the surgical tool 10, as described in more detail in other sections of this document, the power source, such as, for example, the main power source 2002 (see FIG. 129), can supply the power needed for the system will perform its 2005 management functions, including interaction with the user via a user interface. In addition, the auxiliary power supply 2004 can supply power, at least with limited power, necessary for temporary user interaction via the user interface, in the event that the main power supply 2002 cannot supply the necessary power supply, for example, during depletion and / or disconnecting the main power supply 2002 from the surgical instrument 10.

As shown in FIG. 130, power supply system 2000 may include power management circuitry 2006, which may be connected to main power supply 2002 and auxiliary power supply 2004. The power management circuitry 2006 may include or may be selectively coupled to a semiconductor element, a computer chip, or a memory. The power management circuit 2006 may be configured to send analog or digital input signals or signals to various components of the surgical instrument 10, including, without limitation, the control system 2005, the main power supply 2002 and / or the auxiliary power supply 2004, or receive signals from them . In various aspects, the power management scheme 2006 may use software that uses one or more algorithms to additionally express the input signals for controlling and tracking the various components of the surgical instrument 10, including the main power supply source 2002 and / or the auxiliary source 2004. power supply. Such formula-expressed input signals may depend on criteria measured and / or calculated by power management circuit 2006 or in some cases provided to power supply circuit 2006 by another component of the instrument, by a user, or by a separate system that is in functional communication with power supply circuit 2006.

As shown in FIG. 129, the main power supply source 2002 may contain one or more battery cells depending on the needs of the current load of the tool 10. In various aspects, as shown in FIG. 129, the main power supply source 2002 may include a battery 2008, which may include a plurality of battery cells 2010, which, for example, may be connected to each other in series. Battery 2008 may be replaceable. In other words, the battery 2008 can be disconnected and removed from the surgical instrument 10 and replaced with another similar battery. In some aspects, the main power supply source 2002 may contain a rechargeable battery (for example, based on lead, based on nickel, based on lithium ions, etc.). The battery cells 2008 may be, for example, 3-volt lithium battery cells, such as battery cells CR 123A, although in other embodiments, for example, other types of battery cells may be used, such as, for example, battery cells with different voltage levels and / or different chemicals. The user can disconnect and remove the exhausted or used battery 2008 from the surgical instrument 10 and connect the charged 2008 battery to power the surgical instrument 10. The exhausted 2008 battery can then be recharged and reused. It is also assumed that the main power supply 2002 may include at least one disposable battery. In various aspects, the voltage of a disposable battery may, for example, be in the range of from about 9 volts to about 30 volts. The user can disconnect and remove a depleted disposable 2008 battery and connect a new 2008 disposable battery to power the surgical instrument 10.

As described above, the battery 2008 may include rechargeable battery cells and can be detachably accommodated, for example, within portion 14 of the handle of the housing 12. In such circumstances, the battery 2008 can be charged using the base of the charger. For example, as shown in FIG. 131, the base 2012 of the charger can be connected to the battery 2008 by removing the battery 2008 from its location in section 14 of the handle and connecting it to the base 2012 of the charger. As shown in FIG. 131, the base 2012 of the charger may contain a power supply source 2014 for charging the 2008 battery. The power supply source 2014 of the base 2012 charger may be, for example, a battery (or a series of series-connected batteries) or a rectifier that converts alternating current, such as mains power supply, direct current, or any other suitable power source for charging the 2008 battery. The base 2012 of the charger may also contain indicator devices Islands such as LEDs, LCD screen, and so on. n., to show the battery is charging 2008.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 131, the base 2012 of the charger may contain, for example, one or more processors 2016, one or more memory blocks 2018 and interfaces 2020, 2022 I / O. Through the first I / O interface 2020, the base 2012 of the charger can be connected to the power supply unit 2008 (via the power supply unit I / O interface) to allow, for example, loading data stored in the memory of the power supply unit 2008 into the memory 2020 of the base 2012 charger . In various circumstances, the downloaded data can then be downloaded to another computer device via the second I / O interface 2022 for evaluation and analysis, for example, in the hospital system in which the operation is performed using tool 10, in the surgeon's office, instrument distributor, instrument manufacturer, and . P.

The base 2012 of the charger can also contain a charge meter 2024 for measuring the charge of the battery cells of the 2008 battery. The charge meter 2024 can exchange data with the processor 2016 so that the processor 2016 can determine in real-time the suitability of the battery 2008 for ensuring the expected battery performance .

As shown in FIG. 129, the auxiliary power supply source 2004 may comprise one or more battery cells 2026, which may be located, for example, within the handle portion 14. Battery cell 2026 may be rechargeable (for example, based on lead, based on nickel, based on lithium ions, etc.). For example, battery cell 2026 may be a 3-volt lithium battery cell, such as battery cell CR 123A. In addition, the battery cell 2026 can be adapted to be charged without being removed from the tool 10. For example, the main power supply 2002 can be used to charge the battery cell 2026 when the main power source 2002 is connected to the tool 10.

In FIG. 132 illustrates an exemplary implementation of a power management circuit 2006. Among other things, the power management circuitry 2006 may be configured to monitor electrical parameters associated with the operation of the main power supply source 2002 and / or the auxiliary power supply source 2004. For example, the power management circuitry 2006 may be configured to track the levels of electricity in the primary power supply 2002 and / or the auxiliary power supply 2004. Scheme 2006 power management, as shown in FIG. 132 may comprise a charge meter 2028 that may be configured to measure the charge of the main power supply source 2002 and / or the auxiliary power supply unit 2004. The power management circuitry 2006 may also include non-volatile memory 2030, such as, for example, flash memory or ROM, and one or more processors 2032. Processor 2032 may be connected to memory 2030 and may control it. In addition, the processor 2032 may be connected to a charge meter 2028 to read the readings and otherwise control the charge meter 2028. In addition, the processor 2032 can control the output devices of the power management circuit 2006, such as, for example, LEDs.

 The reader will understand that the charge meters 2024 and / or 2028 can be configured to measure voltage, charge, resistance, and / or current. In some examples, charge meters 2024 and / or 2028 may include a circuit for measuring battery capacity that can be configured to measure the state of voltage at a given charge.

In addition to the above, the processor 2032 may store information about the main power supply source 2002 and / or the auxiliary power supply source 2004 in a memory 2030. The information may include, among other things, the available total charge, the number of applications and / or performance data. Additionally, the information stored in the memory 2030 may contain the ID values of the main power supply source 2002, which can be read and stored in the power management circuitry 2006. Such IDs can be, for example, radio frequency tags (RFID), which are read by power management circuit 2006 via RFID transponder 2034. RFID transponder 2034 can read RFID from power sources that include RFID tags. ID values can be read, stored in memory 2030, and compared by processor 2032 with a list of valid ID values stored in memory 2030 or in another storage device associated with power management circuit 2006, for example, to determine if removable / removable primary power supply 2002 associated with the read ID value, genuine and / or appropriate. In such circumstances, if processor 2032 determines that the removable / removable component associated with the read ID value is not genuine, power management circuit 2006 can be configured to prevent the use of tool 10, for example, by opening a switch (not shown) that will cause a power outage to the tool 10. Various parameters that the 2032 processor can evaluate to determine if the component is genuine and / or suitable include, for example, a code and s; component model / type, manufacturer information, region information and / or previous error codes.

In addition to the above, power management circuitry 2006 may also include an input / output interface 2036 for communicating with another device, such as a computer, to allow data stored in memory 2030 to be downloaded to another device for evaluation and analysis, such as in a hospital system in which the operation is performed using the tool 10, in the surgeon's office, tool distributor and / or tool manufacturer. The I / O interface 2036 may be, for example, a wired or wireless interface.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 133, a power management circuit 2006 can selectively transfer power from a main power supply 2002 and an auxiliary power supply 2004 to a surgical instrument 10. For example, processor 2032 can be programmed to provide power to tool 10 from a main power supply 2002 when the main power supply 2002 can supply the tool 10 with electricity, and from an auxiliary power supply source 2004, when the main power supply source 2002 is not Can supply power to tool 10.

During normal operation of the tool 10, the processor 2032, after detecting and determining the authenticity of the main battery source 2002, as described above, can provide the tool 10 with electrical power from the main power source 2002. The main power supply source 2002 may continue to power the tool 10 until the charge of the main power supply source 2002 reaches the specified minimum charge level or drops below it, for example, when the main power supply source 2002 is disconnected and / or depleted. The power management circuit 2006 can be used to determine when the charge of the main power supply source 2002 reaches a predetermined minimum charge level or drops below it. For example, processor 2032 may be configured to use a charge meter 2028 or another similar charge meter to track the charge level of the main power source 2002 and detect when the charge level reaches a predetermined minimum level that can be stored in memory 2030 of power management circuit 2006, or will sink below it. At this point, processor 2032 may notify the user to replace the primary power supply 2002. The power management circuit 2006 may include an indicator, such as one or more LEDs, an LCD screen, for example, that is activated to notify the user of the tool 10 to replace the main power source 2002. In addition, the processor 2032 may be configured to switch the power supply of the tool 10 from the main power supply source 2002 to the auxiliary power supply source 2004 after detecting that the charge level of the main power supply 2002 has reached the specified minimum level or has dropped below it. The reader will understand that additional indicators may be used to provide additional feedback to the user. For example, you can use the indicator to notify the user that the tool 10 switches from the main power source 2002 to the auxiliary power source 2004 and vice versa.

In addition to the above, the processor 2032 can be programmed to charge the auxiliary power supply source 2004 from the main power supply source 2002 when the main power supply source 2002 is connected to a surgical instrument 10. In some examples, after fully charging the main power supply 2002 to a predetermined maximum charge level, the auxiliary power source 2004 power supplies may not be used as long as the main power supply source 2002 can provide a tool 10 power supply. In addition, the power management circuit 2006 may be used to determine the sufficient charge level of the auxiliary power supply source 2004. For example, the processor 2032 may be configured to use the charge meter 2028 to track the charge level of the auxiliary power source 2004 until the charge level reaches a predetermined maximum level that can be stored in the memory 2030 of the power management circuit 2006, at which point the processor 2032 can stop charging auxiliary power supply 2004 from main power supply 2002. The power management circuit 2006 may include an indicator, such as one or more LEDs, an LCD screen, etc., which may be activated to notify the user of the tool 10 about the sufficient charge level of the auxiliary power supply source 2004.

As shown in FIG. 129, the main power supply source 2002 may be mounted in the housing inside the chamber 2038 of the tool handle portion 14. To replace the main power supply 2002, the outer shell of the handle portion 14 may be removed to expose the camera 2038. In some examples, the trigger or switch may be connected to the external the shell section 14 of the handle so that an attempt to remove the outer shell of the section 14 of the handle can be perceived by the processor 2032 as a switching start event from the main power supply 2002 to the whole omogatelny source of power in 2004.

After replacing the main power supply source 2002 with a surgical instrument 10 with a new main power supply source 2002, the power management circuit 2006 can verify the authenticity of the new main power supply source 2002, as described above, and after confirming the authenticity, the power supply control circuit 2006 can transmit electric power from the new main power supply 2002 to tool 10. In addition, the main power supply source 2002 may charge the auxiliary power supply source 2004 Ia, as described above.

Surgical end effectors, such as, for example, the loading unit 20 (FIG. 2 and 3), can be functionally connected to the node 16 of the elongated barrel of the surgical instrument 10 with power supply (FIG. 1). For example, as shown in FIG. 38-58, a surgical end effector, such as, for example, a disposable loading unit (OZB) 5502, can be attached with a release possibility to a surgical instrument, such as, for example, a power-operated surgical instrument 10 (FIG. 1). In various embodiments, the implementation of a surgical instrument may include a barrel 5520, which may, for example, interact with OZB 5502. In various embodiments, a cuff, such as, for example, a rotating cuff 5580, can block OZB 5502 with the possibility of release relative to the stem 5520. In addition to In addition, in various embodiments, the rotation of the cuff 5580 may facilitate attachment and / or alignment of the trigger assembly and / or the hinge assembly, as described herein.

In various embodiments, the implementation of OZB 5502 may include a distal attachment portion 5504, and a barrel 5520 may include an outer tube 5554 and a proximal attachment portion 5522. The distal section 5504 of attachment of the OZB 5502 can receive the proximal section 5522 of the attachment of the trunk 5520 when the OZB 5502 joins the trunk 5520 (FIG. 39). In addition, the rotating cuff 5580 may be located around the proximal mounting section 5522 of the barrel 5520 so that the distal mounting section 5504 of the OZB 5502 may also be located inside the rotating cuff 5580. The rotating cutting cuff 5580 may be attached to the shaft 5502 and / or to the proximal mounting section 5504 and in some embodiments, for example, it can be fixed to be rotatable on the proximal portion 5504 of the barrel mount 5502. In some embodiments, the proximal portion of the barrel mount and 5520 can receive the distal attachment portion of the OZB 5502 when the OZB 5502 joins the trunk 5520. In addition, in some embodiments, the implementation of the cuff 5580 can be fixed rotatably on the OZB 5502.

In FIG. 38-58 it is shown that when moving OZB 5502 between an unattached position and an attached position relative to the barrel 5520 of the surgical instrument OZB 5502 can progressively move along the longitudinal axis defined by the barrel 5520. The distal portion 5504 of the mount OZB 5502 can be inserted into the proximal section 5522 of the mount 5520 when moving the OZB 5502 from the unattached position to the attached position. For example, OZB 5502 can progressively move in direction A (FIG. 39) when moving OZB 5502 between an unattached position and an attached position. In some embodiments, the engagement of the groove-and-groove between the distal attachment portion 5504 and the attachment proximal attachment 5522 may guide the MEB 5502 along the longitudinal axis defined by the barrel 5520. As mainly shown in FIG. 42, the distal attachment portion 5504 may include a guide rail 5514. In addition, as shown mainly in FIG. 44, the proximal attachment section 5522 may include a guide groove 5534. The guide groove 5534 may be sized and designed to receive and guide the guide rail 5514 when inserting the proximal section 5504 of the mounting OZB 5502 to the distal section 5522 of the mounting 5555. may be, for example, a longitudinal groove, and the guide rail 5514 may be, for example, a longitudinal edge. In some embodiments, the implementation of the guide groove 5534 and the guide rail 5514 can prevent torsion and / or rotation of the OZB 5502 relative to the longitudinal axis defined by the barrel 5520.

As shown mainly in FIG. 38, the distal attachment portion 5504 may include a first positioning mark 5510, such as for example the first arrow, and a barrel 5520 and / or a cuff 5580 may include a second placemark 5590, for example, such as the second arrow. The combination of the first and second installation marks 5510, 5590 can provide a combination of the guide rail 5514 and the guide groove 5534, which can simplify the connection of the distal attachment portion 5504 with the proximal attachment portion 5522. As described herein, the translational movement of OZB 5502 along the longitudinal path to the trunk 5520 can fix the OZB 5502 with the possibility of release relative to the trunk 5520. In such cases, the implementation does not need to rotate the OZB 5502 relative to the trunk 5520 to fix the OZB 5502 relative to the trunk 5520. rotation of OZB 5502 relative to the shaft 5520 may be limited and / or prevented by the engagement of the groove-and-groove between the proximal attachment portion 5522 and the distal attachment portion 5504, as described in this report. present document. In various embodiments, the implementation of the cuff 5580 can rotate relative to the OZB 5502 and / or the trunk 5520, to fix the OZB 5502 with the possibility of release on the trunk 5520. For example, as described herein, the cuff 5580 can rotate from its original position (FIG. 53) to the second position (FIG. 54), and then return to the initial position (FIG. 57), to fix the OZB 5502 on the trunk 5520.

As shown mainly in FIG. 42 and 43, the proximal section 5504 of the OZB element 5502 may include a pivoting key or an edge 5506. When moving OZB 5502 in direction A (FIG. 39) between an unattached position (FIG. 38) and an attached position (FIG. 39), the pivoting key 5506 can influence the rotation of the cuff 5580. For example, the rotary key 5506 can rotate and / or displace the cuff 5580 in direction B (FIG. 39) from the initial position to the second position. The distal attachment portion 5504 may be inserted into the proximal attachment portion 5522 if the cuff 5580 is displaced to the second position. Moreover, with the full insertion of the distal attachment portion 5504 into the proximal attachment portion 5522, the pivoting key 5506 may allow the cuff 5580 to rotate in the direction C (FIG. 39) from the second position to the initial position. The direction C may, for example, be opposite to direction B. As described herein, when the cuff 5580 is returned to its original position, the cuff 5580 may block the distal attachment portion 5504 relative to the proximal attachment portion 5522. As shown in FIG. 42 and 43, the pivot key 5506 may include a pivot bevel 5508 at its proximal end. Swivel bevel 5508 may engage with the element of the trunk 5520, for example, to influence the rotation of the rotating cuff 5580.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the rotary bevel 5508 can affect the rotation of the starting shaft 5540, located inside the shaft 5520. For example, as shown mainly in FIG. 47-50, the starting shaft 5540 may include a starting shaft rotator 5544, which may extend radially outward from the starting shaft 5540. The swiveling bevel 5508 of the swiveling key 5506 may engage with the rotator 5544 of the turning shaft when OZB 5502 is inserted into the trunk 5520. V Various embodiments of the swivel bevel 5508 can rotate the rotator 5544 of the starting barrel, which can rotate the starting shaft 5540. For example, the starting shaft 5540 and the rotator 5544 of the starting barrel can turn in the direction B (FIG. 54) between the first position (FIG. 53) and the second position (FIG. 54). As shown in FIG. 47-50, the starting shaft 5540 may engage with a rotating cuff 5580. For example, the rotating cuff 5580 may include a groove 5584 of the rotator, the configuration and dimensions of which allow you to receive and / or hold the rotator of the starting 5544 barrel. The starting shaft rotator 5544 can be held by the rotator groove 5584 so that turning the starting shaft rotator 5544 causes the rotatable cuff 5580 to rotate. In such cases, inserting the OZB 5502 into the barrel 5520 can affect the rotatable cuff 5580 in direction B (FIG. 54), for example , by turning the rotator 5544 starting barrel in the direction B.

As shown mainly in FIG. 44 and 45, the proximal attachment portion 5522 may include a keyway groove 5524, which may include a pivot key 5506 when inserting the distal attachment portion 5504 into the proximal attachment portion 5522. In some embodiments, the implementation of the groove 5524 rotary key may include a backlash 5526 for receiving the rotator 5544 starting barrel. For example, the swivel bevel 5508 at the proximal end of the swivel key 5506 can rotate the rotator 5544 of the starting barrel to the second position and enter it into the shady notch 5526 (FIG. 54). The rotary key 5506 may continue to move along the groove 5524 of the rotary key when inserting the OZB 5502 into the barrel 5520. Also, as the distal end 5509 of the rotary key 5506 passes the rotator 5544 of the starting barrel, the rotator 5544 of the starting barrel can turn back to the first position (FIG. 58), while there may be a corresponding rotation of the rotating cuff 5580 back to its original position.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the rotating cuff 5580 may shift to its original position relative to the barrel 5520 and / or the proximal attachment section 5522. For example, the spring 5592 may move the locking sleeve 5580 to its original position. Spring 5592 may include a proximal end 5594, which may be fixed relative to the stem 5520, and a distal end 5596, which may be fixed relative to the cuff 5580. For example, the proximal end 5594 of the spring 5592 may be fixed in the proximal groove 5538 of the spring (FIG. 51) a) 5520, and the distal end 5596 of the spring 5592, for example, may be fixed in the distal groove 5588 of the spring (FIG. 46) of the rotatable cuff 5580. In such embodiments, when the cuff 5580 is rotated, the distal end 5596 of the 5592 spring may shift relative to the proximal end 5594 spring 5592, which leads to the formation of torsion force. Accordingly, the cuff 5580 can counteract the rotation from the initial position to the second position, and when the cuff is rotated to the second position, the spring 5592 can return the cuff 5580 to the initial position. Since the starting shaft rotator 5544 is in engagement with the cuff 5580, the spring 5592 can also move the starting shaft 5540 to its first position.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the rotating cuff 5580 may include a locking latch 5582, which fixes the OZB 5502 with the possibility of release on the trunk 5520. As shown mainly in FIG. 46, the locking latch 5582 may extend radially inward from the inner perimeter of the rotatable cuff 5580. In various embodiments, the locking latch 5582 may extend into the locking groove 5536 (FIG. 44) in the proximal mounting portion 5522. As shown mainly in FIG. 44, the retainer notch 5536 may form a notch in the guide groove 5534. In various embodiments, the retainer notch 5536 may extend from the guide groove 5534 and may, for example, be perpendicular or substantially perpendicular to the guide groove 5534. In addition, the locking retainer 5582 may move 5536 clamp retainer when rotating the rotatable cuff 5580 between the initial position and the second position relative to the barrel 5520.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the locking latch 5582 may engage with the distal section 5504 mounting OZB 5502, in order to fix the OZB 5502 relative to the barrel 5520. For example, as shown in FIG. 42, the distal attachment portion 5504 may include a guide rail 5514, which may have a blocking cutout 5516 formed thereon. The shape and dimensions of the blocking cutout 5516 can receive the blocking pin 5582 of the rotatable cuff 5580 with the OZB 5502 fully inserted into the attachment proximal section 5522. For example, with full insertion of the distal attachment portion 5504 into the proximal attachment portion 5522, the blocking notch 5516 of the distal attachment portion 5504 may be aligned with the notch 5536 of the fixture of the proximal attachment portion 5522. Accordingly, the locking latch 5582 can move along the latch groove 5536 in the proximal attachment portion 5522 and enter the locking notch 5516 in the distal attachment portion. Moreover, the locking latch 5582 can move towards engagement with the locking notch 5516 under the influence of the torsion spring 5592. For example, after the starting shaft rotator 5544 releases the distal end 5509 of the rotary key 5506, the starting shaft 5540 can return to the first position, the rotating cuff 5580 can return to the initial position under the influence of the torsion spring 5592. Moreover, if the cuff 5580 rotates from the second position, returning to the initial position, its locking retainer 5582 can combine I engage with the locking notch 5516 in the guide rail 5514.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the rotation of the cuff 5580 can simplify the connection and / or the combination of the starting node. For example, the starting shaft 5540 may extend between the proximal end 5546 and the distal end 5542. The proximal end 5546 may have a pivotal connection that can rotate the starting shaft 5540 between the first configuration and the second configuration. In addition, the distal end 5542 may have a coupling for connecting the cutting element OZB 5502. Turning the starting shaft 5540 may facilitate the connection of the cutting element. For example, when the coupling is rotated at the distal end 5542 of the starting shaft 5540, the coupling may engage and connect to the cutting element in OZB 5502. In some embodiments, the coupling may include a bayonet mount that may engage with a corresponding bayonet socket connector on the cutting element in OZB 5502. As shown mainly in FIG. 40 and 41, the trigger assembly may further include a sleeve 5550, which includes a trigger shaft 5540, for example, between the proximal end 5546 and the distal end 5542.

In various embodiments, when turning the starting shaft 5540 inside the barrel 5520, the starting shaft 5540 can be aligned with the starting shaft 5518 groove in OZB 5502. For example, the rotator of the starting rod 5544 can be aligned with the starting shaft 5518 groove with the fully inserted OZB 5502 and connected to the trunk 5520. However, in various embodiments, if OZB 5502 is only partially inserted into the barrel 5520, the starting shaft rotator 5544 can be rotated by means of the rotary key 5506, exiting the starting shaft groove 5518. In other words, the rotator 5544 of the starting barrel can be combined with the groove 5514 of the starting barrel if the starting shaft 5540 is in the first position, and can unite with the groove 5514 of the starting barrel if the starting shaft 5540 turns to the second position. In such scenarios, the implementation, if OZB 5502 is only partially introduced into the barrel 5520, and / or before the OZB 5502 is attached to the barrel 5520 with the possibility of release using a rotating cuff 5580, the starting path of the rotator 5544 of the starting shaft can be blocked by the distal section 5504 of the mount. The connection of the starting shaft 5540 and the cuff 5580 can provide a secure attachment of the OZB 5502 to the barrel 5520, before the starting barrel 5540 can trigger and / or move forward. For example, a surgical instrument will not work until the cutting element in OZB 5502 is connected to the starting shaft 5540, and / or, for example, until the starting shaft 5540 is properly aligned with the shaft 5520.

In certain embodiments of the implementation of the rotation of the cuff 5580 can simplify the connection and / or combination of the hinge node 5559. As shown mainly in FIG. 40 and 41, the hinge assembly 5559 may include a proximal hinged rail 5560, a distal hinge rail 5562, and a swivel connector 5566. In addition, the trunk 5520 may include a groove 5528 of the proximal hinge rail, and OZB 5502 may include, for example, , distal hinge rail 5512. In some embodiments, the proximal hinge rail 5560 can be aligned with the groove 5528 of the proximal hinge rail, and the distal hinge rail 5562 can be aligned with the groove 5512 of the distal hinge rail. As shown in FIG. 46, the hinge connector 5566 may be located within the rotatable cuff 5580. For example, the rotatable cuff 5580 may include a notch 5586 of the hinge connector, and the hinge connector 5566 may be movable within it.

In various embodiments, the implementation, as shown in FIG. 40 and 41, the proximal rail 5560 of the hinge may have a proximal notch 5572, and the distal rail 5562 of the hinge may have a distal notch 5574. Furthermore, the articulated joint 5566 may include a proximal articulated hook 5568 and the distal articulated hook 5572. The proximal articulated hook 5568 may locking in the proximal notch 5572 of the proximal articulated lath 5560. In some embodiments, the distal hinge hook 5570 may functionally engage with the distal notch 5574 distal hinge 5562. How written herein rotating sleeve 5580 can be rotated between the initial configuration and the second configuration. When the cuff 5580 is rotated, the hinged connector 5566 located inside it can also rotate relative to the longitudinal axis defined by the trunk 5520. In various embodiments, the proximal hinge hook 5568 of the hinge connector 5566 may remain fixed in the proximal cut 5572 of the proximal hinge 5560 when turning the hinge connector 5566 Moreover, the distal articulation hinge 5570 of the articulated connector 5566 can move into engagement with the distal notch 5574 of the distal articulated beam 5562. When rotation of the hinge connector 5566 to the cuff 5580 from the second position to the initial position. For example, when OZB 5502 is fully inserted into the trunk 5508, the distal notch 5574 of the distal articulated lath 5562 can be combined with the distal hinge 5568 of the articulated connector 5566. into the distal notch 5574 of the distal articulated lath 5562. For the complete assembly of the hinge assembly 5559, it is necessary that the distal articulated notch 5568 be located in the distal notch 5574.

 As shown mainly in FIG. 45, in various embodiments, the groove 5528 of the proximal hinge rail may include a first lumen 5530 and a second lumen 5532. The proximal and distal hinge hooks 5568, 5570 of the hinged connector 5566 may enter the first and second lumens 5530, 5532, respectively. In some embodiments, the first and second clearances 5530, 5532 can provide space for moving the proximal and distal articulated hooks 5568, 5570 when the cuff 5580 is rotated and / or, for example, the articulated rotation of the articulated node 5559.

 As shown in FIG. 51-58, to connect the OZB 5502 with the barrel 5520 of a surgical instrument, the user can combine the mounting mark 5510 OZB 5502 with the mount mark 5590 of the barrel 5520 and / or the cuff 5580 (FIG. 51). Keeping the alignment of the installation marks 5510, 5590, the user can move OZB 5502 relative to the trunk 5520 along the longitudinal axis defined by the trunk 5520. The user can move OZB 5502 along a straight or essentially straight path, and in various embodiments there is no need to, for example, rotate the OZB relative to the barrel 5520. As shown mainly in FIG. 53, OZB 5502 may continue to move relative to the shaft 5520, and the guide rail 5514 of the distal attachment portion 5504 may enter the guide groove 5534 (FIG. 44) in the proximal mount 5522 of the mount 5520. As the distal mount 5504 moves to the proximal portion 5522 mounting guide groove 5534 may guide the guide rail 5514 and may, for example, keep the alignment of the mounting marks 5510, 5590. In other words, the guide groove 5534 and the guide rail 5514 may prevent rotation of the OZB 5502 rel. respect to the longitudinal axis of the barrel 5520. As shown mainly in FIG. 52, the proximal articulation hitch 5568 of the articulated connector 5522 may extend into the first gap 5530 and may enter the proximal notch 5572 of the proximal articulated rail 5562, and the distal articulation hook 5570 of the articulated connector 5522 may, for example, pass through the second clearance 5532.

As shown mainly in FIG. 54, when inserting the distal attachment portion 5504 into the proximal attachment portion 5522, the bevel 5508 of the rotary key of the rotary key 5506 may abut against the rotator 5544 of the starting barrel. The bevel key 5508 may guide and / or determine the direction of movement of the starting shaft rotator 5544 into the notched recess 5526, which is a continuation of the groove key 5524. In addition, by moving the starting shaft rotator 5544 to the gaping notch 5526, the starting shaft 5540 can turn in direction B. The starting shaft 5540 can turn from the first position to the second position. Such a rotation of the starting shaft 5540 can simplify the connection of the distal end 5542 of the starting shaft 5540 with the cutting element in OZB 5502. In addition, turning the rotator 5544 of the starting barrel can cause the cuff 5580 to rotate in the direction B by engagement between the starting shaft rotator 5544 and the starting rotator groove 5584 trunk (FIG. 46) in the cuff 5580. Cuff 5580 can be rotated from its original position, for example, in the second position. In addition, the locking latch 5582 can move along the latch groove 5536 in the barrel 5520 when the cuff 5580 is rotated. When the cuff 5580 is rotated, the distal end 5596 of the spring 5592 can also rotate because the distal end 5596 of the spring 5592 can be fixed in the distal groove 5588 of the spring (FIG. 46 ) in the cuff 5580. The displacement of the distal end 5596 relative to the proximal end 5594 can create a torsional elastic return force that can lead to the displacement of the cuff 5580, for example, from the second position to the initial position, and can, for example measures, shift the starting barrel 5540 from the second position to the first position.

As shown mainly in FIG. 55, when turning the cuff 5580 to the second position, the proximal hinge pin 5568 can remain engaged with the proximal notch 5572 in the proximal hinge rail 5560. Moreover, the distal hinge hook 5570 can be rotated so that the distal hinge pin 5570 creates a gap for the distal hinge 55K OZB 5502. As shown in FIG. 56, OZB 5502 can be fully inserted into the barrel 5520, if the cuff 5580 and the hinged connector 5566 located therein rotate to the second position. In various embodiments, the implementation of the distal hinge rail 5562 can pass the distal hinge pin 5570 of the hinge connector 5566, if the hinge connector 5566 rotates to the second position. In addition, the distal hinge pin 5570 can be pivotally aligned with the distal notch 5574 in the hinge connector 5566. As shown in FIG. 56, with the full introduction of the OZB 5502 into the barrel 5520, the rotator 5544 of the starting barrel can pass the distal end 5509 of the rotary key 5506.

As shown in FIG. 57, the starting shaft rotator 5544 can rotate in the direction C, if the distal end 5509 of the rotary key 5506 passes the starting shaft rotator 5544. For example, the starting shaft rotator 5544 may rotate in the direction C from the second position to the first position. In addition, the rotation of the starting shaft rotator 5544 may influence the rotation of the cuff 5580 in the direction C from the second position to the initial position. In various embodiments, the implementation of the spring 5592 can shift the starting rod 5540 to its first position and the cuff 5580 to its original position. For example, the starting shaft rotator 5544 may be located in the groove 5584 of the starting barrel rotator (FIG. 46) in the cuff 5580 so that turning the starting shaft rotator 5544 causes the cuff 5580 to rotate. Due to the alignment of the 5566 articulated hinge connector 5570 and the distal notch 5574 distal articulated lath 5562 articulated connector 5566 can be rotated when the cuff 5580 is rotated, and the distal articulated hook 5570 can rotate to engage the distal notch 5574. The articulated 5559 can be fully assembled if the true 5570 hinge engages with the distal notch 5574. Furthermore, by turning the rotator 5544 of the starting shaft in the direction C, the distal end 5542 of the starting shaft 5540 can turn in the direction C, which can facilitate the connection of the cutting element in OZB 5502 with the distal end 5542 of the starting trunk 5540.

As shown in FIG. 58, turning the cuff 5580 may also turn the locking latch 5582 of the cuff 5580 into the locking notch 5516 in the guide rail 5514 of the distal attachment portion 5504. For example, with full insertion of the OZB 5502 into the barrel 5520, the locking notch 5516 can be aligned with the locking groove 5536 so that the locking locking 5582 can rotate through the locking groove 5536 and enter the locking notch 5516. As described herein, the spring 5592 can move the cuff 5580 so that it turns in direction C (FIG. 57) after the rotator 5544 of the starting barrel passes the distal end 5509 of the rotary key 5506. As shown in FIG. 58, when turning the starting shaft rotator 5544 in the direction C, the starting shaft rotator 5544 can be aligned with the starting shaft groove 5518 in OZB 5502. The combination of the starting shaft rotator 5544 with the starting shaft groove 5518 can provide, for example, the distal movement of the starting shaft 5540 to activate OZB 5502 .

As described herein, rotatable cuff 5580 can lock OZB 5502 with the possibility of release relative to the barrel 5520. In addition, turning the cuff 5580 can provide the connection and / or alignment of the hinge assembly 5559, as well as the connection and / or alignment of, for example, the starting shaft 5540 with a cutting element in OZB 5502. In addition, turning the cuff can also unlock the connection of OZB 5502 with the barrel, uncouple the hinge assembly 5559 and / or separate the starting shaft 5540 and the cutting element in OZB 5502. For example, if the cuff 5580 turns again From the starting position to the second position, the locking latch 5582 can be released from the locking notch 5516 in the distal attachment region 5504. Accordingly, the distal attachment portion 5504 can be detached from the proximal attachment portion 5522 along the longitudinal axis, which, for example, defines the stem 5520. In various embodiments, the OZB 5502 can be detached from the stem 5520 without turning the OZB 5502 relative to the stem 5520. However, the cuff 5580 can rotate relative to the barrel 5520, which allows, for example, to separate the distal articulated rail 5562 and the articulated connector 5566 in the cuff 5580 and can separate the starting shaft 5540 and the cutting element in OZB 5502.

As shown in FIG. 59-62, a disposable boot block (OZB) or end effector 5602 can be connected with the possibility of release with the barrel 5620 surgical instrument. In various embodiments, a spring or, for example, a plurality of springs can displace OZB 5602 to a locked position relative to the barrel 5620. For example, OZB 5602 can be connected to the barrel 5620 with release capability via a bayonet rim, and the spring can rotate OZB 5602 to connect OZB 5602 to the barrel 5620 in bayonet connection. OZB 5602 may include a distal attachment portion 5604, and a shaft 5620 may, for example, include a proximal attachment portion 5622. Distal section 5604 mounting OZB 5602 can take the proximal section 5622 of the mount 5620 when attaching the OZB 5602 on the trunk 5620. In other embodiments, the proximal section mounting the stem 5620 can take the distal section of the attachment OZB 5602 when attaching the OZB 5602 on the trunk 5620.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the distal section 5604 fastening OZB 5602 may include a latch 5606, which can extend radially outward from the portion of the distal section 5604 fastening. In addition, the retainer 5606 may include a beveled surface 5608. As described herein, the beveled surface 5608 of the retainer 5606 may engage with a spring, such as a spring 5636b, for example, and may deform the spring 5636b when inserting the distal mount 5604 into proximal attachment area 5622. Moreover, the latch 5606 can be held by the proximal attachment section 5622 to fix the OZB 5602 with the possibility of release on the trunk 5622. As shown mainly in FIG. 59, the proximal attachment section 5622 of the stem 5620 can define a cavity 5624. In various embodiments, the shape and dimensions of the cavity 5624 can allow it to receive the distal section 5604 of the attachment of the OZB 5602. In addition, springs 5636a, 5636b can be located inside the cavity 5624. For example, the first spring 5636a may be located on the first side of the cavity 5624, and the second spring 5636b may be located on the second side of the cavity 5624. The springs 5636a, 5636b may be symmetrical or asymmetric with respect to the cavity 5624. In various embodiments, at least a portion springs 5636a, 5636b may extend into cavity 5624. For example, the leg 5637 of the second spring 5636b may extend into the cavity 5624, and the other leg 5637 of the second spring 5636 may, for example, be held in the proximal attachment portion 5622.

As shown in FIG. 59, the proximal attachment portion 5622 may also include a locking groove 5638, which may be formed in the cavity 5624 and / or may be, for example, accessible through the cavity 5624. The shape and dimensions of the locking groove 5638 may, for example, allow it to take , lock 5606. In various embodiments, the locking groove 5638 can hold the lock 5606, which locks the OZB 5602 with the possibility of release on the trunk 5620. In addition, in various embodiments, the proximal attachment 5622 may include a latch 5630. and 5630 is movable between an unlocked position (FIGS. 59 and 60) and a lock position (FIGS. 61 and 62). In various embodiments, the implementation of the latch 5630 may be spring-loaded, and the spring 5634 may displace the latch 5630 in the locked position. For example, the latch 5630 may include a spring 5634 latch, which can move the latch 5630 to the lock position and / or in this position. The locking position may be distal, for example, with respect to the unlocked position. In some embodiments, latch 5630 may include a thumb grip and / or ribs 5632 to facilitate movement of the latch 5630 from the locked position to the unlocked position. For example, a user may press the thumb grip 5632 and apply the latch 5630 proximally to move the latch 5630 to an unlocked position.

In various embodiments, the latch 5630 may functionally block or at least partially block the locking groove 5638. For example, if the latch 5630 is in the locked position (FIG. 61 and 62), the latch 5635 of the latch 5630 may extend over, at least locking groove 5638. The latch 5630 may cover or partially cover the locking groove 5638 and may impede and / or restrict access to the locking groove 5638. In some embodiments, the latch 5635 of the latch 5630 may impede movement w and / or the shift of the retainer 5606 into the locking groove 5638. Moreover, if the latch 5630 is in the locked position, the latch 5630 can engage with the spring 5636a, 5636b. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 and 62, the latch 5630 may support the spring 5636b so as to limit and / or prevent the deformation of the spring 5636b. Moreover, the latch 5630 can support the spring 5636b so that the distal section 5604 of the mounting of the OZB 5602 cannot be inserted into the cavity 5624. For example, at least the section of the spring 5636b can block the cavity 5624, which can prevent the full introduction of the distal section 5604 of the fastening into the proximal section 5622 attachment. In some embodiments, the proximal attachment portion 5622 may include a plurality of springs that can provide a rotational force on the distal attachment portion 5604 in order to rotate the distal attachment portion 5604 relative to the proximal attachment portion 5622. For example, the proximal attachment section 5622 may include a pair of springs or more than three springs. In other embodiments, the implementation of only one spring in the proximal attachment portion 5622 may be used to rotate the distal attachment portion 5604 relative to the proximal attachment portion 5622. In addition, or alternatively, in various embodiments, the implementation of the distal section 5602 mounting OZB 5602 may include at least one spring, which, for example, can rotate the distal section 5602 mounting relative to the proximal section 5622 mounting.

In various embodiments, if the latch 5630 is in an unlocked position (FIGS. 59 and 60), the locking groove 5638 may be unlocked and / or to a lesser extent blocked by the paw 5635 of the latch 5630. For example, the latch 5606 may extend beyond the unlocked latch 5630 to enter the locking groove 5638. Moreover, the latch 5606 can move beyond the unlocked latch 5630 and enter the locking groove 5638 as described in this document. Moreover, in various embodiments, if the latch 5630 is in the unlocked position, the latch 5630 can be disengaged from the spring 5636a, 5636b. For example, the latch 5630 may not provide protection and / or not limit the deformation of the spring 5636a, 5636b with an unlocked latch 5630.

 As shown mainly in FIG. 59, if the latch 5630, for example, moves and is held in the proximal and / or unlocked position, the spring 5636b may not rest on the latch 5630. In such cases, the implementation of OZB 5602 can move in the direction A so that the distal attachment portion 5604 moves relative to the proximal section 5622 mounting. As shown mainly in FIG. 60, the retainer 5606 of the distal attachment portion 5604 may engage with the spring 5636b and may, for example, compress and / or deform the spring 5636b. In some embodiments, the implementation of the beveled surface 5608 of the retainer 5606 can move along the spring 5636b and can move the loose leg 5637 of the spring 5636b. The deformation of the spring 5636b can create a spring loading force, by means of which the spring 5636b can act on the retainer 5606. As shown in FIG. 61, such a spring force may influence the rotation of the retainer 5606. For example, the retainer 5606 may pivot in the direction B and enter the locking groove 5638 formed in the cavity 5624. In various embodiments, the latch spring 5634 may return the latch 5630 to the unlocked position thereafter as the user releases the latch 5630. Moreover, if the latch 5630 returns to the unlocked position, the latch 5635 tab 5630 can block or partially block the locking groove 5638. In such embodiments, the fastener 5606 of the distal attachment portion 5604 can be locked to release relative to the proximal attachment portion 5622 if the fixture 5606 is held in the locking groove 5638. Moreover, in some embodiments, the locking 5630 can hold and / or support the spring 5636b relative to the fixer 5606 until until the latch returns to the unlocked position again. In various embodiments, to separate OZB 5602 from the shaft 5620, the user can again move the latch 5630 from the locked position to the unlocked position so that the latch 5606 can be rotated and out of the locking groove 5638. In such scenarios, compression and / or deformation of the spring 5636b until the distal attachment portion 5604 is removed from the proximal attachment portion 5622.

In addition to the above, a surgical instrument may be configured to identify or at least attempt to identify an end effector that is attached to the surgical instrument. As will be described in more detail below, in some embodiments, the end effector may include electrical contacts that can interact with corresponding electrical contacts on the barrel of a surgical instrument after the end effector is fixed to the barrel. In such embodiments, the controller of the surgical instrument can provide a wired connection to the end effector, and through such electrical contacts, signal transmission between the controller and the end effector can be provided. As will be shown in more detail below, the end effector may contain at least one unit of information that is stored in such an effector and which the controller may have access to identify the end effector. At least one unit of information may, for example, include a bit, more than one bit, byte, or more than one byte of information. In some other embodiments, the end effector may include a transmitter that can wirelessly transmit a signal to the controller of the surgical instrument. Similarly to the above, the end effector may contain at least one unit of information that is stored in such an effector and which can be transmitted to the controller to identify the end effector. In such embodiments, the controller of the surgical instrument may include a receiver or use a receiver that can receive the transmitted signal from the end effector. Such a receiver may, for example, be located on the barrel and / or the handle of a surgical instrument.

The reader will understand that the end effector, which is connected to the controller wirelessly, can be performed, for example, with the ability to provide a wireless signal. In various circumstances, the end effector can be made with the possibility of a single or more than a single supply of such a signal. In certain circumstances, the end effector may receive a request to transmit a signal at the right time and / or to repeatedly transmit the signal in a continuous manner. In some circumstances, the end effector may include a switch that can be controlled by the user of the surgical instrument before, during and / or after the end effector of the surgical instrument is installed on the surgical instrument. In various embodiments, the implementation of the switch end effector can be a switch on / off. or a power switch that can be closed or used to bring the end effector to a working condition. In at least one embodiment, the end effector may include at least one power supply, such as a battery, for example, which can be used by the transmitter, for example, to provide a signal when the on / off switch is closed. In various circumstances, after bringing the end effector to a working state, the end effector controller can be configured to provide a signal and transmit the signal through the transmitter. In some circumstances, the end effector may not emit a signal until the end effector is brought to a working state. Such a configuration can, for example, save battery power. In certain embodiments, the surgical instrument may be placed in a working mode in which it can wait for a signal from the end effector before the end effector switch is turned on. In various circumstances, a surgical instrument can be in standby mode or in an operating mode with low power consumption, in which, after receiving a signal, the controller puts the surgical instrument into an operating mode with full power consumption. In some embodiments, the end effector switch may transmit a command to the end effector controller to transmit a signal to the controller of the surgical instrument. Such a switch optionally contains a network switch; however, such a switch can be selectively activated by the user to transmit a request to the end effector to transmit the signal at the right moment and / or in continuous mode, starting from the right moment.

As shown in FIG. 114, an end effector, such as, for example, an end effector 9560, may include a din or more electrical contacts, such as contacts 9561, which can be used to bring the end effector 9560 to a working state. For example, as shown in FIG. 112, the trunk 9040 of the surgical instrument may include a jumper wire 9562, which may be configured to close or electrically connect two or more contacts 9561 in case an end effector 9560 is installed on the trunk 9040. Jumper 9562 may short circuit with two contacts 9561, a battery 9564 and at least one integrated circuit 9566 placed on the printed circuit board 9565. After the circuit closes, in addition to the above, the battery 9564 can supply the integrated circuit or circuits 9566 and the lead dit end effector 9560 in a working condition. In various circumstances, an integrated circuit or circuit 9566 and an antenna 9567 formed on a printed circuit board 9565 may include a controller and transmitter as described above. In certain embodiments, the trunk 9040 may include a biasing element, such as a spring 9563, for example, which may be configured to bias the jumper 9562 to a short circuit with electrical contacts 9561. Before connecting the jumper 9562 to electrical contacts 9561 and / or after disconnecting the end effector 9560 from the trunk 9040 circuit can be opened, the power from the battery 9564 may not be supplied to the integrated circuit 9566, and / or the power supplied to the integrated circuit 9566 may be limited and the ends th effector 9560 may be inoperative. As a result of the above, in such embodiments, the end effector assembly can be brought to a working state as a result of installing the end effector on the surgical instrument. In addition to the above, in various ways, the design and placement of the end effector and the surgical instrument can be such that only complete and correct installation of the end effector on the surgical instrument will cause the end effector to become operational.

As described above and shown in FIG. 111, the end effector may join the surgical instrument, as shown in step 9600, be brought into service, as shown in step 9602, and then recorded on the surgical instrument, as shown in step 9604. In addition to the above, if the surgical instrument an attempt to register a wireless signal from an end effector translated to a working state; a surgical instrument can be made with the possibility of assessing the quality of such a signal. In various embodiments, the implementation of asynchronous serial communication between the end effector and the surgical instrument can be used to assess the quality of the signal received by the surgical instrument. For example, the end effector may emit a signal containing a start bit that precedes a data group, such as, for example, an information bit, and / or a stop bit that follows a data group. In such cases, the start bit, data bit, and stop bit may contain a 10-bit group of characters or, for example, a combination of bits. If the controller of a surgical instrument can identify the start bit and stop bit of a bit combination, in such cases the controller may assume that the data byte or data bits received between the start bit and the stop bit are correct and / or contain complete information. In various circumstances, the start bit and / or stop bit may contain a stop period before transmitting the next bit of information and / or before retransmitting the previous bit of information.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 110, a surgical instrument controller can match a combination of bits or specific data bits to determine if the data it received is correct and / or if it contains complete information. In various circumstances, data can be transmitted in such a way that the controller can evaluate the data and match the data with a pattern or data combination patterns, in accordance with which it expects to receive data. For example, such a template can be designed and organized so that the most significant data bit, for example, such as the leftmost data bit, for example, contains 1. If the controller can identify that the most significant data bit is 1, then the controller is shown in step 9700 in FIG. 110, can perform an XOR operation on the data and match the data with a pattern or data combination patterns that are available to the controller, as shown in step 9702. The XOR operation is well known, and its detailed description is not described in this document for short. If the bit combination adopted by the surgical instrument matches the bit pattern available to the controller, the controller will need to identify the end effector. After identifying the end effector, the controller may access the stored information with respect to the end effector, for example, in a memory chip accessible to the controller. If the controller determines that the most significant data bit of the received bit combination is not 1, then, as shown in step 9700, the controller may perform a bit shift operation. Many bit shift operations are known, for example, such as arithmetic shifts, logical shifts and / or cyclic shifts, which can be used to exclude the bad data bits that were received before the desired combination of bits. In various circumstances, the leading, or leftmost, zero data bit may be excluded, as shown in step 9704, FIG. 110, and the bit combination may be shifted to the left until, for example, the leading bit becomes 1. In addition to the above, at this point the shifted bit combination can be matched with the bit pattern patterns in order to identify the end effector. If the shifted bit pattern does not match the pattern of the bit pattern, the controller can repeat the bit pattern shift until the next value of 1 in the bit pattern becomes the leading bit, and the new bit shifted bit pattern can be matched with the bit pattern patterns. Such a shift and juxtaposition operation may be performed any suitable number of times until the end effector is identified and / or until the surgical instrument decides that the end effector cannot be identified.

The reader will understand that a surgical instrument may contain information about any suitable number of end effectors. If the end effector has been identified with a surgical instrument, in addition to the above, the surgical instrument can access stored information about the end effector. For example, such stored information may contain instructions for a surgical instrument regarding, firstly, the distance that the trigger element in the end effector should be applied to complete the starting stroke, and / or, secondly, for example, maximum power or torque the motor of the surgical instrument should be applied to the starting element. Such information or a set of information may be unique for each end effector, and, accordingly, it is one or the other identification of the end effector that allows the surgical instrument to function as desired. Without such information, the surgical instrument will not be able to determine the stroke length required to fully use the end effector and / or restrict the power it supplies to the trigger element accordingly. In various circumstances, a surgical instrument may rely on sensors made with the possibility of detecting the moment of completion of the starting stroke and / or excessive level of power supplied to the starting element. Such sensors may prevent the engine power limit of the surgical instrument from being exceeded and, for example, breakdown of the starting effector element.

In addition to the above, some end effectors may be more reliable than other end effectors, and, as a result, some end effectors can withstand higher applied motor powers of the surgical instrument. Accordingly, other end effectors may be less reliable and, as a result, can withstand only smaller in magnitude applied motor forces. In addition to the above, in order to determine the appropriate applied forces for any particular end effector, the surgical instrument must identify the end effector mounted on the surgical instrument. If the surgical instrument cannot identify the end effector, such a surgical instrument may use a work program or a default mode. In the default operating mode, the controller of the surgical instrument can limit the power that the motor can supply to the starting element of the end effector, for example, to minimum power or default power. The minimum power can be chosen in such a way that the motor does not damage the end effector, regardless of the specific end effector used. In some circumstances, the parameters for using the least durable, or least reliable, end effector that can be used with a surgical instrument can be used in the default operating mode so that the surgical instrument will not deliver excessively large power to the end effector regardless of the end effector used. In various embodiments, it is the use of electrically powered surgical instruments that can result from the application of an excessively large power to the end effector. In other words, end effectors that were used in manual surgical instruments in the past were essentially impossible to damage with such manual surgical instruments, but they can be easily destroyed by using an electrically operated surgical instrument. Moreover, in such end-effectors used in the past, technology was not used to identify them with driven surgical instruments, and as a result of using the default work program described in this document, such end-effectors used in the past can still be used with surgical instruments driven. In this case, other default parameters can also be used in the default work program. For example, the default work program may use the minimum start length or the default length. In various cases, the shortest stroke length of the end effector can be used in the default work program, which can be used with a surgical instrument. In such cases, the trigger element will not touch or collapse as a result of contact with the distal end of the end effector, regardless of which end effector is used.

The reader will realize that for a surgical instrument that contains stored information about the end effectors used with the surgical instrument, there may be a need to update the information available for such a surgical instrument. For example, if the preferred operating parameters for a particular end effector change over time, it may be necessary to update the information that is stored in each surgical instrument. In addition, updating information in surgical instruments may also be required if a new end effector is developed for use with such surgical instruments. If information in a surgical instrument is not updated in a timely manner, the surgical instrument may not be able to identify the end effector and, as a result, use the default work program that is described in this document. In various embodiments, the implementation of the surgical instrument may not contain stored information in relation to the end effectors or at least some end effectors that can be used with the surgical tool. In such embodiments, the end effector may contain stored information or parameters related to the end effector. Such parameters may be available and / or transmitted to a surgical instrument. In addition to the above, in various circumstances, the installation of an end effector on a surgical instrument can help induce a signal of an end effector that can be received by a surgical instrument. In addition, similarly to the above, a signal transfer request can be transmitted to the end effector. In various circumstances, such a signal can be transmitted to a surgical instrument via a wired and / or wireless connection. In some embodiments, the implementation of a surgical instrument may request a signal transmission end of the effector.

In addition to the above, the end effector may contain data on one or more parameters relative to the end effector, which are stored in its memory. Such parameters may be stored, for example, in one or more memory devices. In various circumstances, such parameters may include the desired starting speed of the starting element, the desired speed of pulling the starting element, the distance or travel of the starting element, the maximum torque that will be applied to the starting element by the motor of the surgical instrument, and / or the maximum hinge angle of the end effector, for example, if such an end effector is really a hinged end effector. Some hinge end effectors are described in US Patent Application No. 13 / 803,097, entitled HINGED SURGICAL SURGICAL TOOL, CONTAINING A STARTING DRIVE, the full description of which is incorporated herein by reference. Regarding the parameter related to the maximum hinge angle, the controller can use this parameter to limit the range of hinge rotation to which the hinge portion can deviate. In some cases, the maximum hinge angle may be 45 degrees, for example, which is measured relative to the longitudinal axis of the surgical instrument. Regarding, for example, a parameter relating to the starting speed and / or the pull-in speed of the starting element, the parameter may contain data on the desired speed of the starting element and / or, for example, the percentage or fraction of the maximum engine speed. For example, a value of 3 for starting speed may mean that the controller must control the engine at 30% of its maximum speed, for example, when extending the starting element. In addition, for example, a value of 5 for the pull-in speed may mean that the controller must control the engine at 50% of its maximum speed, for example, when the starting element is pulled in. As regards, for example, the parameter relating to the maximum torque of the engine, the parameter may contain data on the maximum value of the torque and / or, for example, the percentage or fraction of the maximum value of the engine torque. In addition, as regards, for example, a parameter relating to the stroke length of the trigger element, such a parameter may contain data on the desired distance that the trigger element can move and / or retract, and / or, for example, the percentage or fraction of the maximum stroke length of the surgical element. tool. For example, a value of 60 may indicate that the starting stroke should be, for example, 60 mm. In various cases, parameter values may be transmitted in any suitable format, including a binary format containing, for example, bits and / or data bytes. An example of the implementation of a set of parameters presented in FIG. 110A.

In addition to the above, in various embodiments, the surgical instrument can be configured to obtain parameters from the end effector in a specific order. For example, the signal from the end effector may contain a start bit, the first bit combination for the first parameter, for example, the maximum hinge angle, the second bit combination for the second parameter, for example, starting speed, the third bit combination for the third parameter, for example, retract, a fourth combination of bits for a fourth parameter, such as maximum engine torque, a fifth combination of bits for a fifth parameter, such as a stroke, and, for example, a stop bit. This is just one example. Any suitable number of parameters can be transmitted as a signal component. Moreover, any suitable number of start bits and / or stop bits may be used. For example, the start bit may precede the bit combination of each parameter, and / or the stop bit may follow the bit combination of each parameter. As described above, the use of at least one start bit and / or at least one stop bit can simplify the analysis of the quality of the signal from the end effector performed by the controller of the surgical instrument. In certain embodiments, the start bit and / or stop bit may not be used. Moreover, the end effector can transmit multiple signals for transmitting the parameters of the end effector to a surgical instrument.

In addition to the above, in various circumstances the controller of a surgical instrument can use a checksum to evaluate the quality of the signal received from the end effector and / or whether the received signal is authentic, that is, the signal from the recognized end effector. The checksum may contain a value that is used to guarantee that there is no error in storing, transmitting and / or receiving data. It can be obtained, for example, by calculating binary data values and a certain combination of binary values using some algorithm. For example, binary data values can be summed, although many other algorithms can be used. In embodiments where parameters associated with specific end effectors are stored in a surgical instrument, as described above, the checksum value may also be stored for each such end effector. During use, the controller of the surgical instrument can provide access to the parameter data and the checksum value, and after calculating the calculated checksum value, the controller can match the calculated checksum value with the stored checksum value. If the calculated value of the checksum is equal to the stored value of the checksum, the controller can make a conclusion about the correctness of all data retrieved from the memory of the surgical instrument. At this stage, the controller can provide control of the surgical instrument in accordance with the data loaded from memory. If the calculated checksum value is not equal to the stored checksum value, the controller can conclude that at least one block of data retrieved from the memory is incorrect. In addition to the above, in various cases, the controller can then control the surgical instrument in accordance with the default work program, block the trigger of the surgical instrument and / or, for example, otherwise transmit a message about the actions to the user of the surgical instrument. In certain cases, the controller may re-attempt to download data from the memory of a surgical instrument and repeat the calculation of the checksum and its comparison, as described above. If the recalculated checksum value and the stored checksum value match, the controller can then control the surgical instrument according to the data loaded from memory. If the recalculated checksum value and the stored checksum value do not match, the controller can then control the surgical instrument in accordance with the default work program, block the trigger of the surgical instrument and / or, for example, otherwise transmit the action message to the surgical instrument user.

In those embodiments where the parameters related to the terminal effector are stored in the memory of the terminal effector, as described above, the checksum may also be stored in the memory of the terminal effector, for example. During use, the controller of the surgical instrument can access the parameter data and the stored checksum value. In addition to the above, in various cases, the end effector can transmit one or more signals that provide the transmission of parameters and checksum values to a surgical instrument. As a result of the above, the stored checksum value and parameters can be transmitted simultaneously, and for the purpose of the description given in this document, the checksum value accepted by the surgical instrument can be considered the accepted value of the checksum. Similarly to the above, after receiving these parameters, the controller can calculate the checksum value based on the parameters, that is, calculate the calculated value of the checksum and compare the calculated value of the checksum with the received value of the checksum. If the calculated value of the checksum is equal to the accepted value of the checksum, the controller can make a conclusion about the correctness of all these parameters extracted from the end effector. At this stage, the controller can control the surgical instrument according to the data loaded from the end effector. If the calculated value of the checksum is not equal to the accepted value of the checksum, the controller may conclude that at least one block of extracted data is incorrect. In addition to the above, in various cases, the controller can then control the surgical instrument in accordance with the default work program, block the trigger of the surgical instrument and / or, for example, otherwise transmit a message about the actions to the user of the surgical instrument. Such situations may occur more often in cases where data is transmitted from the end effector to a surgical instrument, for example, through one or more wireless communication sessions. In any case, in certain embodiments, the controller can re-attempt to download data from the end effector and repeat the calculation of the checksum and its comparison, as described above. If the recalculated checksum value and the received checksum value match, the controller can control the surgical instrument according to the data loaded from the end effector. If the recalculated checksum value and the accepted checksum value do not match, then in addition to the above, the controller can then control the surgical instrument in accordance with the default work program, block the trigger of the surgical instrument and / or, for example, otherwise send a message about the actions to the user of the surgical instrument. As a result of the above, in various ways there is no need for storing in the memory of a surgical instrument any information regarding end effectors that are used in the operation of a surgical instrument with a fixed end effector. In such circumstances, all data regarding the parameters of the end effector, the checksum value that is used to confirm the integrity of the data, can be stored in the memory of the end effector. A surgical instrument may include an operating system that requires input of sufficient background information from the end effector in order to use such an end effector. This may not require a special work program for each end effector that can be used with such a surgical instrument. A single work program can be used with any end effector. Thus, it is not necessary to update the memory of the surgical instrument to include work programs for additional end effectors and / or, for example, modified programs for already existing effectors.

As shown in FIG. 149-154, in addition to or instead of the wireless communication systems that are used to identify the end effector installed on the surgical instrument that is described herein, the surgical instrument in accordance with at least one embodiment may contain means for scanning and identifying end effector. In FIG. 153 presents the handle 11020 with a bar code reader 11022, which can be configured to scan the bar code shown in FIG. 149 and 150, on the terminal effector 11060 shown in FIG. 151, 152 and 154. Similar to other embodiments described herein, end effector 11060 may include a trunk section, an emphasis 11062 and / or a cassette 11064 with brackets, in which, for example, one or more end effector 11060 sections may include in itself the bar code put on them. In some embodiments, the implementation of the end effector 11060 may include a removable component 11063 located between the anvil 11062 and the cassette 11064 with brackets, which can be removed before or after installing the end effector 11060 on the surgical instrument. In FIG. 151 presents the option of placing a bar code 11065 on the trunk section of the end effector 11060. In FIG. 152 shows the option of placing a bar code 11065 on a removable component 11063. In various embodiments, the handle 11020 of a surgical instrument may include a bar code reader, such as a bar code reader 11024, for example, bar code reading end effector. For example, as shown mainly in FIG. 154, the handle 11020 may include a section 11022 of an internal bar code reader, configured to read a bar code 11065 printed on the stem of the end effector 11060. In at least one such case, the bar 110 reader section 11022 may include in the chute 11026, the size and shape of which is made with the possibility of receiving the trunk end effector 11060, and it can be installed device 11024 reading a bar code within and / or opposite the hole 11027 formed in the chute 11026, so so that the barcode reader 11024 could read the barcode 11065. As the reader will understand, many different barcode reader devices and barcode processing protocols are known, and in this case any of the appropriate methods can be used. In some cases, the barcode may contain bidirectional information, which allows, for example, to read the barcode in two different directions. In some cases, the barcode may use multiple information layers. In some cases, the barcode reading protocol may include background information that anticipates information identifying the end effector and / or otherwise transmit information to the surgical instrument that will allow the surgical instrument to perform operations or perform a specific work program. In some cases, a bar code reader may emit one or more light rays that may fall on a set of peaks and valleys forming a bar code. In some cases, barcode valleys can pass inwards and / or form inside the barrel of an end effector. Emitted rays of light can be reflected on a bar code reader, where they can be processed. Here, the barcode reader 11024 of the handle 11020 is placed and installed in the chute 11026 so as to limit or at least substantially limit the region of the emitted and reflected light rays within the barcode reader section 11022. Due to this, the barcode reader 11024 will not be able to accidentally or unintentionally scan another end effector, for example, a end effector that differs from that intended for installation on this surgical instrument and which may still be in the operating room.

In addition to the above, in various cases the end effector can pass through the barcode reader of a surgical instrument before the final end effector is installed on the surgical instrument. In various alternative embodiments, the surgical instrument may include a moveable bar code reader that can be used to scan the bar code of the end effector after mounting the end effector on the surgical tool. In any case, after identifying the end effector, at least in certain circumstances, the controller may gain access to a work program configured to apply the identified end effector. The barcode in one form or another may contain a system loader. In other circumstances, as indicated in other sections of this document, the bar code may provide the controller with the necessary information or parameters to use the standard operating system. In certain circumstances, each end effector can be assigned a sequential identification number so that any two end effector, even if they belong to the same type of end effector, can have two different bar codes applied to them. In such circumstances, the controller can be configured to block the use of the end effector that was previously scanned with a surgical instrument. Such a system may, for example, exclude the possibility of re-using at least partially spent end effector.

As described above, the end effector can be configured to communicate with a surgical instrument through a wireless connection and / or wired connection. As for the wired connection, as shown in FIG. 115, a proximal end effector end, for example, such as the proximal end 9969 of the end effector 9960, may comprise a plurality of electrical contacts 9968 that may be in electrical connection with a plurality of electrical contacts 9948 located on and / or within the distal end 9942 of the surgical stem 9940 tool. As shown mainly in FIG. 116, each electrical contact 9968 may include a contact element 9967 that is at least partially located within the cavity 9965 of the element. Each electrical contact 9968 may also include a biasing element, such as a spring 9966, for example, which is located between the contact element 9967 and the inner side wall of the element cavity 9965. Spring 9966 can be made with the possibility of displacement of the contact element radially outward. The contact element 9967 may include a protruding 9964 protruding therefrom, which can displaceably move into engagement with the other internal side wall of the element cavity 9965 under the action of the spring 9966, at least until the end effector 9960 is mounted on the stem 9940. The interaction between limiter 9964 and the side wall of the cavity cavity 9965 element can impede the movement of the contact element 9967 to the outside. When installing the end effector 9960 on the barrel 9940, the contact elements 9967 of the electrical contacts 9968 can be fed inward by the action of the electrical contacts 9948 of the barrel, counteracting the bias force applied by the springs 9966, as shown in FIG. 116. In different circumstances, each pair of contacts 9948 and 9968 may contain a circuit or channel 9950 connection. Although the example shown shows three pairs of contacts, any suitable number of contacts and / or communication channels can be used. As shown in FIG. 117, the trunk contacts 10048 in each case may contain a movable element 10047 and a bias spring 10046, configured to press the movable elements 10047 to the corresponding contacts 10068 of the end effector. As shown in FIG. 118, in some embodiments, the implementation of one or both of the contact of the end effector and the contact of the trunk may contain a flexible section. For example, the end effector may contain flexible contacts 10168, which can elastically interact with corresponding contacts 9948 of the trunk.

As for the above-described embodiments, in various circumstances, the end effector can be mounted on the barrel along the longitudinal axis. As shown mainly in FIG. 115, the most proximal contact 9968 of the terminal effector first comes into electrical contact with the most distal contact of the 9948 stem. As the reader will understand, at the moment of interaction of such contacts, the end effector 9960 is not fully fixed on the 9940 trunk. Although such interaction between these contacts may be temporary, that is, until the deeper fit of the end effector 9960 on the trunk 9940, the surgical instrument controller may be disoriented and may misinterpret one or more signals of the end effector 9960. A similar situation with incorrect interpretation may occur at the moment when the longitudinal contact matrix 9968 of the end effector gradually comes into contact with the longitudinal contact matrix of the 9948 stem until the end effector 9940 is completely seated. In various embodiments, the controller of the surgical instrument can be configured to ignore signals transmitted through the contacts until the moment the most proximal contact of the 9968 end effector interacts with the most proximal pin 9948 of the barrel. As shown in FIG. 119 and 120, one of the pairs of contacts may differ from the other pair of contacts so that the controller can identify which pair of contacts is in contact and, as a result, ensures that the end effector is fully fitted. For example, the end effector and the trunk of a surgical instrument may include a first pair of contacts 10248a, 10268a, a second pair of contacts 10248b 10268b and a third pair of contacts 10248c, 10268c, and this third pair of contacts may differ from the first pair of contacts and from the second pair of contacts. If the first pair of contacts 10248a, 10268a begin to interact, the contact element 10267a may be fed inwards so that the first connection section 10263a of the contact element 10267a comes into contact with the first section 9951a of the connection channel 9950a circuit, and the second section 10264a of the connection of the contact element 10267a comes into contact with the second Section 9952a of the link channel 9950a. In this position of the contact element 10267a, both the first section 9951a of the circuit and the second section 9952a of the circuit can transmit a signal through the contact element 10267a. If the second pair of contacts 10248b, 10268b starts to interact, the contact element 10267b may be fed inwards so that the first connection section 10263b of the contact element 10267b comes into contact with the first communication channel 9950b circuit section 9951b, and the second connection section 10264b of the contact element 10267b contacts the second section 9952b of the link channel 9950b. In this position of the contact element 10267b, both the first section 9951b of the circuit and the second section of the chain 9952b can transmit a signal through the contact element 10267b. If the third pair of contacts 10248c, 10268c begins to interact, the contact element 10267c can be fed inwards so that the first connection section 10263c of the contact element 10467c comes into contact with the first communication channel channel 9950c section 9951c and the connection of the contact element 10267c comes out of contact with the second section 9952c of the circuit of the communication channel 9950c and comes into contact with the first section of the circuit 9951c. In this position of the contact element 10267a, the first circuit portion 9951c can transmit a signal through the contact element 10267c. As a result of the above, for the first, second, and third set of contacts, a special order can be provided for connecting with their respective communication channels when the end effector is fully seated, and the controller can be configured to determine the state of such a full fit. For example, at the initial moment of installation of the end effector on the trunk, the third contact 10264c may first come into contact with the first contact 10248a of the trunk. In this position, only two sections of the circuit, i.e. 9951a and 9952a, can transmit a signal from the end effector to the controller, and, accordingly, the controller can be configured to detect different voltage drops on the connections compared to the voltage drop that is observed in If all five sections, for example, 9951a, 9952a, 9951b, 9952b and 9951c, can transmit a signal when the end effector is fully seated. Similarly, the end effector can additionally be inserted into the barrel until the third contact element 10267c comes into contact with the second contact 10248b of the barrel and the second contact element 10267b comes into contact with the first contact 10248a of the barrel. In this position, only four sections of the circuit, i.e. 9951a, 9952a, 9951b and 9952b, can transmit a signal from the end effector to the controller, and, accordingly, the controller can be configured to detect different voltage drops on the connections compared to the voltage drops which is observed if all five areas, for example, 9951a, 9952a, 9951b, 9952b and 9951c, can transmit a signal when the end effector is fully seated.

In some cases, if the end effector is mounted on an elongated barrel of a surgical instrument, the operator can activate the end effector drive system and / or articulation system, for example, to close, start, and / or articulate the end effector. The end effector may include a first branch, a second branch, and one or more sensors configured to detect the position of the first branch relative to the second branch. As shown in FIG. 121-124, the end effector 10360 may contain the first jaw, or the stop 10362, and the second jaw, or the cassette 10364 with brackets, the stop 10362 being movable to and from the cassette 10364 with brackets. The end effector 10360 is often introduced into the patient through the trocar, and the end effector 10360 may not always be clearly visible, even with an endoscope. As a result, the user of the surgical instrument may not be able to accurately assess the position of the stop 10362 relative to the second branch 10364. As indicated above, to facilitate the use of an end effector, the end effector 10360 may include a sensor for detecting the position of the stop 10362. In various circumstances, such a sensor may be able to detect the gap between the stop 10362 and the cartridge 10364 with brackets. Some sensors can be made with the possibility of detecting the angular position of the stop 10362 relative to the cassette 10364 with brackets. Such sensors are described in U.S. Patent Application No. 13 / 800,025, entitled CASSETTE SENSOR SYSTEM WITH FOLDERS FOR REGISTRATION OF TISSUE THICKNESS, filed March 13, 2013, and US Patent Application No. 13/800,067, entitled CASETTE SENSOR SYSTEM, TEMPERATURE SYSTEM FABRICS filed March 13, 2013. All information described in US Patent Application No. 13 / 800,025, entitled FOLDER CASSETTE SENSOR SYSTEM FOR REGISTRATION OF FABRIC THICKNESS, filed March 13, 2013, and US Patent Application Number 13 / 800,067, entitled CASSETTE SENSOR SYSTEM WITH BRACKETS FOR REGISTRATION OF FABRIC THICKNESS, filed March 13, 2013, is incorporated herein by reference. Regardless of the sensor or sensors used, the position of the stop 10362 can be transmitted to the user of the surgical instrument through the screen. Such a screen can be placed on the end effector 10360 and / or on the barrel of a surgical instrument, for example, on the stem 10340. If the screen is placed on the end effector, the screen can be seen, for example, with an endoscope. In such cases, the screen may be located on the end effector so that it is not obscured by the trocar, which provides for the introduction of the end effector into the surgical field. In other words, the screen can be placed in such a way that, during use, it can be located distal to the distal end of the trocar. If the screen is placed on the trunk, such a screen can be placed on the trunk so that it is not obscured by the trocar. In other words, the screen can be positioned so that in the process of application it can be located proximal to the proximal end of the trocar. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 121-124, the screen 10390 is placed on the trunk 10340.

As shown in FIG. 121, stop 10362 of the end effector 10360 is depicted in the fully open position. In this position of the stop 10362, the trigger element 10330 of the end effector 10360 is in the proximal position and has not yet been extended distally. As will be described in more detail below, the trigger element 10330 extends distally to move the stop 10362 to the cassette 10364 with brackets. The position of the trigger element 10330 shown in FIG. 121, may reflect the non-activated, most proximal position of the trigger element 10300. If, as shown mainly in FIG. 125, the stop 10362 is in the fully open position, the screen 10390 of the stop is not highlighted. As the reader will understand, the position of the stop 10362 in one of several different positions can be reflected on the stop screen 10390. The stop screen 10390 is able to display five possible positions of the stop 10362; however, other embodiments are contemplated that may provide a stop screen using more than five indicators or less than five indicators. When moving the stop 10362 from its open position to its closed position, the screen 10390 can sequentially display the position of the stop 10362 using the indicators 10391-10395. Indicator 10391 displays the stop 10362 in a slightly closed position. Indicators 10392, 10393 and 10394 display stop 10362 in partially closed positions. Indicator 10395 displays the stop 10362 in a fully closed or parallel position. When comparing FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 it will be clear to the reader that the trigger element 10330 has been pushed distally to at least partially close the stop 10362. If the stop 10362 is in the position shown in FIG. 122, the stop position sensor can detect the new position of the stop 10362, and as shown in FIG. 126, the indicator 10391 of the stop screen 10390 may light up. When comparing FIG. 122 and FIG. 123 it will become clear to the reader that the trigger element 10330 was pushed distally to further close, although not completely close, the stop 10362. If the stop 10362 is in the position shown in FIG. 123, the stop position sensor can detect the new position of the stop 10362, and as shown in FIG. 127, the indicator 10393 may light up. When comparing FIG. 122 and FIG. 123 it will become clear to the reader that the stop 10362, for example, was turned about 10 degrees and that when turning the stop 10362, for example, the indicator 10392 of the screen 10390 stop would turn on only about 5 degrees. From a comparison of FIG. 123 and FIG. 124 that the trigger element 10330 was extended distally to completely close the stop 10362. If the stop 10362 is in the position shown in FIG. 124, the stop position sensor can detect the new position of the stop 10362, and as shown in FIG. 128, indicator 10395 may come on. When comparing FIG. 123 and FIG. 124 it will become clear to the reader that the stop 10362, for example, was turned about 10 degrees and that when turning the stop 10362, for example, the indicator 10394 of the screen 10390 stop would turn on only about 5 degrees.

In addition to the above, the end effector and / or the surgical instrument may include a controller that may be configured to control the stop screen 10390. For example, if the end effector includes a stop screen 10390, the controller may be located in the end effector. If the barrel of the surgical instrument includes the stop screen 10390 and / or any other area of the surgical instrument includes the stop shield 10390, the controller can be placed in the surgical instrument. In other embodiments, one of the end effector and the surgical instrument may include a stop screen 10390, while the other of the end effector and the surgical instrument may include a controller. In any case, the sensor or the stop position sensors can exchange signals with the controller. The controller may be configured to interpret one or more sensor signals or sensors to determine the position of the stop 10362. The controller may be associated with the stop screen 10390 so that, as noted above, to enable the indicators 10391-10395. In various circumstances, each of the indicators 10391-10395 may, for example, contain an LED. In such circumstances, each LED can be in electrical connection with the output channel of the microprocessor of the controller so that the controller can selectively turn on one or the other LED regardless of other LEDs. In various cases, the controller can continuously assess the position of the stop 10362 based on data received from the stop sensor, and using this data, continuously determine which of the indicators will turn on. For example, with an open or closed stop 10362, the controller can track the position of the stop 10362 and promptly display such information for the user of the surgical instrument using indicators 10391-10395. In such cases, the user is provided with real-time or near real-time feedback with information on the position of the stop 10362. In other cases, the controller may set a delay in displaying information on the position of the stop 10362 until the stop 10362 stops moving. or, at least, essentially does not stop moving, for example, for a certain period of time. As the reader will understand, the indicators 10391-10395 can display the individual positions of the stop 10362; however, there is a possibility that the stop 10362 can pass through each of these separate positions only for a very short period of time if, for example, it is in the closed state. In various circumstances, the controller may use one or another algorithm to determine which indicator should turn on. For example, the controller may apply an algorithm that determines which of the indicators more accurately represents the position of the stop 10362, even though the position of the stop 10362 may not be combined with any of the individual positions that may be displayed by the screen 10390 of the indicator. In various circumstances, the controller may include two adjacent indicators on the indicator screen 10390 if the stop 10362 is in an intermediate position between two separate positions represented by two adjacent indicators.

In addition to the above, in different circumstances, each of the indicators 10391-10395 may comprise an LED that emits light of the same color or at least substantially the same color. In other cases, one or more of the indicators 10391-10395 may emit light whose color is different from the color of other indicators 10391-10395. For example, the indicator 10391 can be configured to emit light of yellow, while the indicators 10392-10395 can be configured to emit, for example, green light. As will become clear to the reader, as shown in FIG. 122, the fabric T located between the anvil 10362 and the cassette 10364 may not be fully clamped by the anchor 10362 if the anvil 10362 is in the partially closed position shown in FIG. 122, and if the indicator 10391 associated with this position of the stop 10362 lights up yellow, the user of the surgical instrument is reminded to take care before moving the end effector 10360 and / or continuing the installation process of the brackets. In some embodiments, one or more of the indicators 10361-10365 in each case can be configured to emit light of more than one color. For example, each indicator 10361-10365 may contain an LED, made with the possibility of emitting light green and red. In such cases, the indicators 10361-10365 can emit green light, indicating the position of the stop 10362 as indicated above, or alternatively emit red light when an error occurs in the end effector 10360 and / or a surgical instrument.

As described above, the end effector stop can be configured to move relative to the bracket with brackets between the open position and the closed position, and the surgical instrument system can be configured to detect the movement of the stop and transmit information about the movement of the stop to the user. It also discusses options for implementation in which the cartridge with brackets is moved relative to the stop. In at least one such embodiment, the stop may be fixed or incapable of rotation. When fixing or locking the rotation, the support can rigidly protrude from the end effector frame section; such a portion of the frame of the end effector from which the stop protrudes, and the cartridge with brackets may be able to pivotally rotate relative to another portion of the end effector or the barrel of the surgical instrument. Regardless of whether the end effector has the ability to pivot, in this case, the bracket with brackets can be rotated relative to the stop. The systems and methods for detecting the movement of the abutment described in this document can be extended to detect movement of a cassette with brackets. Moreover, the systems and methods for displaying the movement of the abutment described in this document can be extended to display the movement of a cassette with brackets.

In various embodiments, the operator may need to retract the actuator during the starting stroke. The surgical instrument described in Zemlok ‘763 uses a retractor unit, which contains a mechanical interface with a hand drive with a drive tube that moves when exposed to a ratchet mechanism triggered by a retractable lever mounted on the handle. This arrangement allows the doctor to retract the starting rod and ultimately the drive element of the loading unit if during the installation of the brackets there is a malfunction of the power supply or engine or control system. However, problems may arise in the effective use of such a retractor unit, since the motor and the engine reducer remain engaged during the actuation (activation) of the ratchet mechanism. Thus, the assembly of such a device must provide sufficient torque to rotate the gears in the gearbox and the motor shaft to allow the drive tube to be rotated manually. The formation of such forces can create an extreme load on the components of the retractor unit, which can lead to a catastrophic failure of the retractor unit. Surgical instruments 10 shown in FIG. 1-28, can be performed using unique and innovative knotting mechanisms that eliminate the likelihood of this and other problems.

For example, surgical instrument 10 may include a retractor assembly 120, which includes a retractor unit 124 with an upper portion 126 and a lower portion 128. In various forms, the retractor assembly 120 is mechanically connected to the drive tube 102 by the drive gear 130 and the retract gear 132. See FIG. 5. The drive gear 130 is connected without rotation to the drive tube 102 so that the rotation of the drive gear 130 causes the drive tube 102 to rotate. The drive gear 130 and the retract gear 132 may contain bevel gears or the like to enable the gearing therebetween as shown in FIG. 5. The engagement gear 132 may be associated with the first spindle 134 (FIGS. 4 and 5), which is substantially perpendicular to the upper and lower portions 126 and 128 of the retractor block 124 and passes between them. The spindle 134 may be fixed for rotational movement around the axis of the spindle SA-SA, which is essentially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the surgical instrument 10. See. FIG. 5. In various forms, the engagement gear 132 may have a first spur gear 136 associated with it. The first spur gear 136 is engaged with the second spur gear 138, which is functionally mounted on the second spindle 137, which is also installed in a substantially perpendicular position between the upper and the lower portions 126 and 128 of the indentation block 124 and provides for the possibility of rotation around the second axis SA'-SA 'of the shaft defined in this case. The second spur gear 138 is secured by gearing with the third spur gear 140, which is located on the first spindle 134. The third spur gear 140 is connected to the first engagement portion 144 of the overrunning clutch 142. The overrunning clutch 142 also includes a second clutch section 146, which is rotatably mounted on the first spindle 134 above the first clutch section 144. A spring or springs (not shown) may be located between the first and second clutch sections 144 and 146, thus keeping the first and second clutch sections 144 and 146 in a raised “uncoupled” position, as shown in FIG. five

It will be obvious that when the drive tube 102 is rotated, the drive gear 130 will force the first, second and third spur gears 136, 138, 140 to rotate, as well as the first clutch section 144 and the corresponding spindles 134, 137. As the second clutch section 146 can rotate around the spindle 134 and disengaged from the first clutch section 144 by means of a spring mechanism located between them (not shown), the rotation of the first clutch section 144 is not progressively transmitted to the second clutch section 146. As shown in FIG. 5, the first and second engagement portions 144 and 146 include a plurality of teeth 148 of the engagement, each of which has a flat engagement surface and an inclined displacement surface. As will be described in more detail below, the second clutch portion 146 may be displaced into the gear with the first clutch portion 144 by the action of the pull lever 150. The displacement surfaces of the teeth 148 are allowed to engage the engagement surfaces with each of the teeth so that the rotation of the second engagement section 146 causes the first engagement section 144 to rotate. The rotation of the first clutch section 144 also causes the rotation of all gears that are engaged, and then transmits the torque to the drive tube 102 around the longitudinal axis LA-LA.

As shown in FIG. 6, the lever 150 may include an elongated section 152 of the handle, which includes a cam section 154. The cam section 154 may include an opening in which an overrunning clutch needle bearing (not shown) can be installed, which is attached by mechanical contact with the clutch (not shown) connected to the first spindle 134 to allow the lever 150 to retract around the first spindle 134. The publication Zemlok '763 also describes the operation of such a needle bearing of an overrunning clutch in the collection ke with the clutch, and it is fully incorporated herein by reference. In various forms, the pull lever 150 includes one or more cam elements 156, each of which has a cam surface 158 formed thereon. In the first position, the pull lever 150 is located along the recess for the lever 14 of the housing 12, as shown in FIG. 1. A spring located between the first and second clutch sections 144, 146 serves to spring up the lever 150 for engaging relative to the upper section 126 of the block 124 for retracting. As shown in FIG. 6, the cam elements 156 are positioned within the corresponding cam grooves or niches 160 in the upper portion 126 of the retracting unit 124. The lever 150 retract is held in the first position by means of a return spring 162, which is installed between the upper portion 126 of the block 124 retracting and the cam portion 154 of the lever 150 retracting. The cam elements 156 and the cam grooves 160 prevent further rotation of the lever 150 to retract.

In use, if the lever 150 enters the recess 14 of the lever (FIG. 1) in the housing 12, the cam elements 156 contact with the corresponding cam grooves 160 to move the cam section 154 of the lever 150 into the downward direction, counteracting the bias force of the spring (spring) located between the first and second sections 144, 146 clutch. Such a downward movement causes the compression of the spring (s) and delivers the first and second clutch sections 144, 146 to the locking engagement. Rotation of the cam portion 154 in the counterclockwise direction drives the needle bearing of the overrunning clutch, which is connected to the clutch and the first spindle 134. Continuously advancing the pull lever 150 causes the clutch 142 to rotate, which in turn rotates the spur gears 136, 138, 140 and gears 132 and 130 retract and drive. In this case, in turn, the casing tube 102 rotates around the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool. Since the starter rod 104 is in threaded engagement with the drive tube 102, turning the drive tube 102 in the manner described above leads to the pull-in (or proximal axial movement) of the start rod 104 into the drive tube 102.

During operation, the drive tube 102 can be made to rotate in the direction opposite to the direction of retraction (for example, in a clockwise direction) around the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool using the engine 100. Such rotation of the drive tube 102 causes the trigger bar 104 to move along axis in the distal direction DD. Such an extension of the trigger rod 104 and the drive element 60 of the boot block 20 may be referred to herein as “actuation”. As shown, for example, in FIG. 5, the gear train assembly 170 is used to establish the amount of drive torque required to feed the start rod 104 in the distal direction DD in order to actuate the loading unit 20. The gear train assembly 170 may include a gear housing 172 that is connected to engine 100. For example, gearbox housing 172 may be connected to engine housing 101 by screws 103 or other mechanical fasteners and / or fastening mechanisms. The gear unit 170 and the engine 100 may collectively be referred to as a “drive unit”, which is essentially referred to as element 186.

The housing 172 of the gearbox can be mounted with the possibility of rotation in the section 190 of the engine limiter, which is made integral with the housing 12 or mounted on it without the possibility of rotation. This arrangement allows the drive unit 186 to rotate inside the housing 12 around the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool, but prevents its axial movement within the housing 12. The engine 100 may, for example, be supplied with power from a power supply 200 of the type described in more detail in Zemlok 763, and / or from the power supply system 2000 (FIG. 129).

To simplify the supply of electric current to the drive unit 180 and, in particular, to the engine 100, you can use a unique circuit 210 contacts. For example, the contact circuitry 210 may include an annular negative contact 212 of the engine and an annular positive contact 114 of the engine, located on the engine housing 101, as shown in FIG. 4. The fixed negative contact 216 may be fixed on the housing 12 for movement in contact with the negative contact 112 of the engine. Similarly, the fixed positive contact 218 can be fixed to move in contact with the positive contact 214 of the engine when the drive unit 180 is rotated inside the housing 12. The fixed negative and positive contacts 216, 218 may contain flexible spring contacts to facilitate the assembly installation of the drive unit 186 inside the housing 12. Fixed negative contact 216 may electrically connect to power supply 200 via negative wire 220, and fixed positive contact 218 can be electrically connected to the power supply 200 via the positive wire 222. Such a contact circuit allows the electrical supply from the power supply 200 to the motor 100, while turning the drive unit 186 in the handle body around the tool's longitudinal axis LA-LA.

As shown in FIG. 5, the gear unit 170 may comprise a planetary gear unit that is operatively connected to the motor shaft 107. For example, in one embodiment of the installation, an annular gear 173 may be formed on the inner surface of the gear housing 172. The driving central gear 171 may be connected to the engine shaft 107. The driving central gear 171 may be in gear with a plurality of first planetary gears 175, which are mounted on the first carrier 174 of the planetary gears so that they are also in gear with the ring gear 173. The first central gear 176 may be formed or otherwise attached to the first carrier is 174 planetary gears and can be fixed by gearing with the second planetary gears 178, which are mounted on the second carrier 177 planetary gears. The second planetary gears 178 are also secured in gearing with ring gear 173. The second central gear 179 may be formed or otherwise secured on the second carrier 177 of planetary gears and may be fixed by gearing with a plurality of third planetary gears 181. Third planetary gears 181 can be fixed on the third carrier 180 planetary gears in gearing with ring gear 173. The third central gear 183 may be formed or otherwise attached to the third in odile 180 planetary gears and is in gearing with many fourth planetary gears 187, which can be connected to the output shaft unit 184, which is mounted rotatably in the gear housing 172 using a bearing 185. The fourth planetary gears 187 are also fixed in gear with an annular gear gear 173.

In FIG. 7 shows one embodiment of mounting the drive unit 186 rotatably in the housing 12. As shown in this figure, the engine mounting pad 192 on the engine stopper 190 may include a gear housing segment 196 that is rotatably mounted inside. For example, in one mounting variant, the gear unit 170 is mounted on the gear housing housing segment 196 with the possibility of rotation with the bearing 185. Similarly, the engine 100 is mounted for rotation with the bearing 198 in the section 13 of the engine installation housing. block 186 can be rotated in the housing 12.

The output shaft unit 184 may be operatively associated with a clutch 230 (FIG. 5) of the type and design described in Zemlok ‘763, which is fully incorporated into this document by reference. In this publication, you can find additional details regarding the design and operation of such a clutch 230. However, in an alternative embodiment, the clutch 230 may be replaced by a two stem connection or a sleeve, which serve to connect the output shaft unit 184 directly to the drive tube 102.

If a sticking surgical tool, described in Zemlok ‘763, or powering off the tool occurs, the user must use the retractor unit to return the drive bar to its original position, which facilitates the removal of the loading unit. However, effective retracting was complicated by the fact that the retracting system had to create enough torque needed for the return stroke of the many gears in the gear assembly. Thus, the effective operation of such a system of intrusion could be difficult.

In at least one embodiment of the surgical instrument described herein, to solve such a problem, a unique and innovative system of releasing the drive unit is used, which is essentially referred to as element 240. For example, as will be described in more detail below, if locking system of the drive unit with the possibility of release is in the "locked" position, the rotation of the drive unit 186 inside the body 12 of the handle becomes impossible. The drive unit 186 is held in a locked position when the surgical instrument “triggers” to transmit the engine torque from the engine 100 through the gear unit 170 and ultimately to the drive tube 102. If it is necessary to operate the retract unit 120, the system 240 locking the drive unit moves to the “unlocked” position to allow the drive unit 186 to freely rotate inside the casing 12, thus eliminating the need to create there is sufficient return torque for the return movement of the gear mechanism in the gear train assembly 170. The gear unit 170 may remain functionally connected between the engine 100 and the drive tube 102 during the operation of the retractor unit 120. In such embodiments, although the gear unit 170 remains functionally connected to the engine 100 and the drive tube 102, free rotation of the drive unit 186 may reduce the amount of torque required to rotate the gear unit 170 when the gear mechanism returns in order to retract the drive tube 102. Such a reduction in the required amount of torque can increase the efficiency of the retractor system.

For example, as can be seen in FIG. 8, the third spur gear 140 of the draw-in unit 120 may include an unlocking cam 141, which is adapted to actuate the locking pawl unit 250 of the drive unit locking system 240. One form of the locking dog assembly 250 is shown in FIG. 9-11. For example, as can be seen in FIG. 10, the locking pawl assembly 250 may include a pawl element 252 that contains a locking notch 254 formed therein. The dimensions of the locking notch 254 allow a series of spaced apart first locking wedges 256 formed around the outer circumference of the gearbox housing 172 to freely pass through this slot. See, for example, FIG. 12 and 13. The locking wedge 258 of the dog is formed on the locking dog 252 for locking the engagement with any of the first locking wedges 256, as will be described in more detail below. As can also be seen in FIG. 8-11, the locking pawl assembly 250 may further include a pawl guide rod 260, which is adapted to slide into the opening 194 in the engine installation area 192. Spring 262 dogs wound on the guide rod 260 of the dog and is placed between the element 252 dogs and platform 192 installation of the engine so as to spring the section 264 cam gear element 252 dogs for engagement with the third spur gear 140.

Referring to FIG. 8, 13, and 14, one method of controlling the retractor assembly 120 and the drive unit locking system 240 will be described. In FIG. 13, the drive block system 240 is shown in its locked position. As can be seen in this figure, the pawl element 252 is displaced to the distal locking position with the pawl spring 262. In such a locked position, the locking wedge 258 of the dog on the element 252 of the dog is in locking engagement with one corresponding one of the first locking wedges 256 on the gearbox housing 172. In this position, the node 120 is not involved, and it is impossible to rotate the node 170 of the gear train in the housing 12. Turning on the engine 100 when pressing the main power switch 80 (FIG. 1) causes the rotation of the drive tube 102 and eventually axial extension rod 104, which drives the driving rod 60 distally through the loading unit 20.

If, for example, the drive rod 60 is sticking in the tissue clamped in the loading unit 20, or the power supply of the engine 100 fails, or for some other reason, the engine 100 fails to change the direction of rotation of the drive tube 102 to eventually retract the trigger rod 104, the doctor can use the node 120 retracting, to manually retract the trigger rod 104 and the drive rod 60. In FIG. 8, the retractor assembly 120 is shown in a non-activated position (i.e., if the block 240 of the drive unit is in the locked position). To begin the manual pull-in process, the doctor removes the pull-in lever 150 from the recess 14 for the lever in the handle body 12 (in the R direction, see FIG. 6). Moving the pull lever 150 in the direction R causes the cam portion 154 of the pull lever 150 to rotate inside the pull block 124. Such an initial rotation of the engagement lever 150 in the R direction causes the unlocking cam 141 to engage with the cam engaging portion 264 of the pawl element 252 to displace the pawl element 252 to the unlocked position, thus allowing the drive unit 186 to rotate freely inside the handle body 12. The cam grooves 160 in the retractor unit are of sufficient length and are positioned in such a way as to enable such a rotary movement of the cam section 154 of the retractable lever 150 without first releasing the clutch unit 142. Thus, the cam grooves 160 may be longer than the cam grooves in the previously proposed options for installing the retractor unit to facilitate unblocking the drive unit assembly 186 before applying starting movements that cause the actuator tube 102 to rotate. For example, in at least one installation variant, the cam grooves 160 may be elongated to allow the retracting lever 150 to rotate by approximately fifteen degrees. As the doctor continues to rotate the lever 150 in the R direction, the cam gear portion 264 will move along the outer circumference of the unlocking cam 141 on the third spur gear 140. Further rotation of the retract lever 150 in the R direction causes the cam elements 156 to engage on the cam portion 154 with the end portions of their respective cam grooves 160 in order to displace the cam portion 154 in a downward direction. Such a downward movement causes the spring (s) located between the first and second clutch sections 144 and 146 to compress, in order to ensure the gearing of the teeth 148 located on them. Further rotation of the cam section 154 in the counterclockwise direction can set in motion needle bearing overrunning clutch, which is connected to the clutch and the first spindle. Continuously advancing the lever 150, the clutch assembly 142 is rotated, which in turn rotates the spur gears 136, 138, 140 and the gears 132 and 130 of the retract and drive. In this case, in turn, the casing tube 102 rotates and the starting rod 104 is pulled in.

The lever 150 retracting can be activated by a given amount of movement until the section of the lever 150 retracts against the section of the housing 12. After this, the lever 150 of the retracting returns to its first position under the action of the return spring 162. This operation raises the cam section 152, which allows the second clutch portion 146 to also move up and free from engagement with the first clutch portion 144. The needle bearing of the overrunning clutch can release the clutch, thus allowing the retracting lever 150 to return to the first position without affecting the movement of the drive tube 102. After the retracting lever 150 returns to the first position, the drive unit 186 is again in the locked position. The use of a ratchet mechanism or the rotation of the pull-in lever 150 can be repeated many times until the starting rod 104 returns to the desired position.

Since during such a rotational movement, the gearbox housing 172 is free to rotate, the amount of torque required to rotate the drive tube 102 and gears in the gear unit 170 is significantly reduced compared to the torque required for the previously used retractor units to function. Such a mechanism also advantageously prevents the transmission of torque forces that are transmitted to the shaft 107 of the engine under the action of the retractor unit, while the gear unit 170 remains connected in a driven manner with the shaft 107 of the engine. In other words, the gear unit 170 may remain in the drive connection between the engine shaft 107 and the drive tube 102 during the operation of the retract unit 120. Such a mechanism differs from the retractor mechanisms described, for example, in US Patent No. 7,959,050, which is fully incorporated into the text of this document by reference, but which will result in physical disconnection or physical interruption of transmission chain portions when the retract system is activated.

In FIG. 15-18, another surgical instrument 310 is shown that is substantially similar to the surgical instrument 10 described above with the exception of the differences described below. As shown in FIG. 16, the tool 310 includes a gear assembly 470, which includes a gear housing 472, which may be coupled to the engine 100, for example, as described above. The gear assembly 470 and the engine 100 may collectively be referred to as a “drive unit”, which is essentially referred to as element 486. The gear assembly 470 may be identical to the gear assembly 170 described above with the exception of the differences described below.

In at least one embodiment of the mechanism, the gearbox housing 472 may be mounted without rotation or may be integral with the motor restrictor portion 190 or otherwise fixed to the housing 12 without the ability to rotate using the various methods described in this document. Since the drive unit 486 does not rotate with this arrangement, it can be directly connected to the power source through wires. For example, power may be supplied to engine 100 as described in Zemlok 763, or by other appropriate means. As shown in FIG. 16, the gear assembly 470 may include a planetary gear design that is operatively associated with an engine shaft 107. For example, in one embodiment, the location of a fixed ring gear 473 may be formed on the inner surface of the housing 472 of the gearbox. The driving central gear 471 may be connected to the engine shaft 107. The central drive gear 471 may be in gear with a plurality of first planetary gears 475, which are mounted on the first carrier 474 planetary gears. The first planetary gears 475 are also in gearing with a fixed ring gear 473. The first central gear 476 can be formed on the first carrier 474 planetary gears and can be in gear with many second planetary gears 478, which are mounted on the second carrier 477 planetary gears. The second planetary gears 478 may also be in gear with a fixed ring gear 473. The second central gear 479 may be formed or fixed on the second carrier 477 of the planetary gears and may be in gear with a plurality of third planetary gears 481, which are mounted on the third carrier 480 planetary gears. The third planetary gears 481 are in gearing with a fixed ring gear 473. The third central gear 483 may be formed or otherwise attached to the third carrier 480 of the planetary gears. The third central gear 483 may be in gearing with a plurality of fourth planetary gears 487, which are connected to an output shaft block 484, which is mounted rotatably in a gear housing 472 on a bearing 185. A plurality of fourth planetary gears 487 may be in gear with a locked ring gear 485, which is mounted with the possibility of rotation on the housing 472 gear. Gears 471, 473, 475, 476, 478, 479, 481 and 483 may be collectively referred to herein as the gear assembly 460.

The locking ring gear 485 may be rotatably mounted in the annular cavity 490 in the engine restraint portion 190 (FIG. 16). The size of the cavity 490 is chosen in such a way as to ensure that the locking ring gear 485 around the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the tool is free to rotate inside it. The locking ring gear 485 can be installed in the annular opening 490, and then its position is fixed by the locking element 492, which is inserted or otherwise blocked in the annular opening 490.

Surgical instrument 310 may further include a drive unit locking system 540 that includes a movable ring assembly 542. In at least one form, the movable ring assembly 542 may include, for example, a movable ring 543, which has at least one and preferably a plurality of locking elements, for example, in the form of studs 544. Studs 544 protrude from the movable ring 543 and made with the possibility of selective locking engagement with locking ring gear 485. Each of the locking studs 544 can be received with the possibility of sliding into the corresponding opening 546 in the locking element 492. Axial movement of the movable ring 5 42 is provided by the scenes 550, which is connected with the clutch latch 560. As shown in FIG. 15, the clutch retainer 560 may include a spring retainer that is pressed against the outer circumference of the third spur gear 140. The clutch retainer 560 may have a hook 562 formed thereon, which is connected to the shift bracket rod 564. The shift bracket bar 564 may have some flexibility and may be rotatably connected with the movable ring 542. During normal operation (i.e., when the starting rod 104 is supplied by the engine 100), the locking bolts 544 are in locking engagement with the locking ring gear 475, to prevent rotation of the locking ring gear 475 so that torque is transmitted to the output shaft block 484 and ultimately to the drive tube 102.

If the doctor intends to use the retractor assembly 120 to retract the trigger rod 104, the retractor lever 150 is rotated from the initial position shown in FIG. 15, in direction R. As the pull lever 150 rotates, the clutch lock 560 rotates with the third spur gear 140, thus causing the shift brace rod 564 to move the movable ring 542 in the distal direction DD. In the process of moving the movable ring 542 in the distal direction of the DD, the locking bolts 544 exit the locking engagement with the locking ring gear 485 to allow the locking ring gear 485 to rotate relative to the gear housing 472. The doctor continues to use the ratchet mechanism of the pull lever 150, translating it into the final position shown in FIG. 18. In at least one embodiment, the pull lever 150, for example, needs only be rotated about fifteen degrees to release the locking studs 544 from engaging with the locking ring gear 485. After the doctor releases the pull lever 150, the return spring 162 will return the pull lever 150 to its original position, and the doctor can repeat the procedure until the trigger rod 104 is pulled to the desired position. Since the locking ring gear 485 can rotate freely inside the bearing housing 472, the rotation of the drive tube 102 and the output shaft block 484 will not be obstructed by other gear mechanisms in the gear assembly 470. Thus, the amount of torque generated by the ratchet mechanism required to retract the trigger rod 104 is reduced compared to the retracting mechanisms that remain in operative engagement with the gear mechanisms in the gear assembly during the retracting process. Moreover, despite the reduction in the required torque, the starting rod 104 may remain in operative engagement with the gear assembly 470. In other words, the starting rod 104 may remain functionally connected to the engine 100. If the movable ring 542 comes into contact with the bearing 185 at the engine mounting site 192, the locking studs 544 engage in locking engagement with the locking ring gear 485. The latch 560 of the clutch can be made the possibility of displacement relative to the third spur gear 140 after the movable ring comes into contact with the bearing 185 or another portion of the engine installation site 192. Thus, the locking system of the drive unit 540 serves to facilitate the rotation of at least a portion of the drive unit within the grip body during the application of the return movements of the casing tube 102 in order to reduce the amount of return torque required to return the starting rod 104.

Shown in FIG. 19, the surgical instrument 610 is substantially identical to the surgical instrument 310, except that the clutch latch 560 is connected to the third spur gear 140 so as to dispense with the linking 550, which is used in the surgical instrument 310. As can be seen, for example, in FIG . 18, the rod 564 of the switching bracket is directly connected to the movable ring 542. A reciprocating movement of the retracting lever 150, as indicated above, causes the displacement of the movable ring 542 and engages and releases the locking studs 544 and the locking ring gear 485.

In FIG. 20 and 21, another surgical instrument 610 ′ is shown, which is substantially similar to the surgical instrument 610 with the exception of the differences described below. For example, in this version of the mechanism, at least two leaf locking springs 620 and locking element 622 of the ring gear are located on the gearbox housing 472 'of the gear train assembly 470'. As can be seen in FIG. 20, each blocking spring 620 and corresponding locking element 622 are located in a groove 624 in the housing 472 ′ of the gearbox. In this version of the mechanism, the locking studs 544 ', which are associated with the movable ring 542, are adapted to come into contact and press the corresponding locking spring 620 inward to act on the corresponding locking element 622 of the ring gear, translating it into locking engagement with the locked ring gear 485 In this position (shown in FIG. 20) it is not possible to rotate the locking ring gear 485 relative to the gearbox housing 472 '. If the shift brace rod 564 feeds the movable ring 542 in the distal direction DD, the locking studs 544 'are released from the engagement with their respective locking spring 620, which allows the spring 620 to bend back to its original position to allow the locking elements 622 of the ring gear to release from the locking locking ring gear 485, allowing it to rotate relative to the gear housing 472 '. Thus, when the engagement assembly 120 is actuated, the locking ring gear 485 can rotate freely relative to the gear housing 472 ′ to thereby reduce the amount of return torque required to retract the trigger rod 104 in the proximal direction PD.

In FIG. 22-24, another example of a retractor assembly mechanism for selective manual retracting of a distal portion of a trigger bar of a surgical instrument 710 is presented if the distal portion of a trigger bar or other component of a surgical instrument with which it is functionally connected is sticking during operation, or a working power failure occurs. promotion node starting rod. In addition to the differences described below, the surgical instrument 710 may be similar in design and operation to the surgical instruments described above and / or described in Zemlok 763, which is fully incorporated into the text of this document by reference.

As can be seen in FIG. 22-24, the surgical instrument 710 includes a housing 712, in which the trigger rod assembly 720 is functionally located. For example, in the housing 712, a motor and a gear assembly (not shown) may functionally be placed to impart rotational motions to the drive tube, which can axially move the trigger bar assembly 720 in various ways described herein. In at least one embodiment of the mechanism, the trigger rod assembly 720 may include a proximal trigger element or a rod portion 722 that functionally interacts with the drive tube in various ways described herein. In other embodiments of the surgical instrument mechanism, the proximal portion 722 of the trigger rod may functionally interact with other actuators and systems that are configured to apply axial movements to the proximal portion 722 of the trigger rod.

As further can be seen in FIG. 22-24, the trigger bar assembly 720 may further include a distal trigger element or a bar portion 724 that is operatively connected to a proximal end of the loading block 20 connected in axially moving along the axis of the driving rod 60 associated with it in various ways described herein . A pull-in unit 730 in the form of a pull-in unit 732 may be rotatably positioned between the proximal portion 722 of the trigger rod and the distal portion 724 of the trigger rod. In the example of the variant of the mechanism, the pull-in unit 732 includes a drive lever 734, which has a lever handle section 736, which is fastened to the stud on the proximal section 722 of the starting rod. The pull-in unit 732 further includes a distal pull-in lever 738, which is attached to the drive lever 734 and the distal section 724 of the starting rod, as shown in the figure. In the illustrated embodiment, the housing 712 includes a distal-extending section 714 of the hinge housing, which may also include a distally passing segment 716 of the shaft housing. Segment 716 of the shaft housing may serve to lock the pulling unit 732 axially as it moves axially in the distal and proximal directions in response to axial movement of the starting bar unit 720. To provide axial movement of the pull-in unit 732 relative to the shaft housing segment 716, the drive lever 734 passes through a groove 718 formed, as shown in the figure, in the shaft housing segment 716.

In FIG. 22 shows the position of the trigger bar assembly 720 and the retractor assembly 730 prior to actuation. In FIG. 23 shows the position of the trigger bar assembly 720 and the retractor assembly 730 after actuation in the distal direction DD. If in the process of triggering, the doctor will need to return the drive rod 60 back to its original position, he will simply need to grip the handle lever handle portion 736 of the drive lever 734 and turn it in the R direction, as shown in FIG. 24, with the distal portion 724 of the starting rod and the driving rod 60 moving in the proximal direction PD. As shown in FIG. 22 and 23, in the process of triggering, the proximal end 725 of the distal portion 724 of the trigger bar can be typically axially spaced with the distal end 735 of the proximal portion 734 of the trigger bar to a distance denoted RD. The distance RD may, for example, remain unchanged in the process of actuation and the usual retracting of the trigger bar assembly 720 using a drive unit. However, when the doctor actuates the retractor unit, the distance between the proximal end 725 of the distal portion 724 of the trigger bar and the distal end 735 of the proximal portion 734 of the trigger bar (distance RD ') is less than the distance RD. In addition, as can be seen in FIG. 22, the distance between the initial position of the distal working head 62 of the driving rod 60 and the final position of the distal working head 62 (i.e., after a full starting stroke) is represented as a distance FD. If desired, the distance RD may be large enough to provide the necessary retraction of the distal portion 724 of the starting rod (i.e., moving closer to the distal end 735 of the proximal section 722 of the starting rod) to return the working head 62 from the end position to its original position. In other words, the distal portion 724 of the trigger rod can be drawn in by the pull-in distance, which is at least equal to or greater than the trigger distance FD. In this embodiment, for example, when the working head 65 is jammed or stopped in the end position for another reason, the actuation of the retractor unit may ensure that the drive rod 60 is fully retracted to return the distal working head 62 to its original position, while the distal working head 62 may allow the stop 22 to open at the hinge and free the fabric.

In FIG. 25-28 shows an example of an alternative version of the trigger bar assembly 720 ', which can selectively retract by hand. As shown in the figures, the trigger bar assembly 720 'includes a proximal trigger bar portion 722', which can functionally interact with the drive tube in various ways described herein. In other embodiments of the mechanisms of the surgical instrument, the proximal portion 722 ’of the trigger rod may functionally interact with other actuators and systems that are configured to apply control movements to the proximal portion 722’ of the trigger rod. The trigger bar assembly 720 'may also include a distal trigger bar 724' that is at least partially hollow and is functionally connected to an end of the loading unit 20 that can be moved along the axis of the driving rod 60, connected with it in various ways, described in this document. For example, the distal portion 724 'of the trigger rod may have an opening 725 inside, the dimensions of which allow the distal portion 724' of the trigger rod to slide along the axis along the proximal portion 722 'of the trigger rod for the RDD retracting distance. The retract distance may be equal to or greater than the start distance FD to allow the retractor unit 730 'to return the drive rod 60 a sufficient distance to move its working head 62 from the end position EP to its initial position SP. See FIG. 25. A retractor assembly 730 'may include a retract latch 732'. The latch 732 'retract can include a latch handle 735 that can move between the locked position (FIG. 25 and 26) and the unlocked position (FIG. 27 and 28). In the locked position, the latch 732 ′ of the engagement locks the distal portion 724 ′ of the trigger rod, preventing it from sliding along the axis along the proximal portion 722 ′ of the trigger rod and the distal portion 724 ′ of the trigger rod. In this position, the proximal portion 722 'of the trigger rod is essentially moved as a unit. Thus, in the locked position, the trigger bar assembly 720 ′ may be fed in the distal direction DD to its end position EP, as shown in FIG. 26. When sticking the drive rod 60 or failing or stopping the power supply to the tool during the start-up (or for other reasons), the doctor can simply turn the retract latch handle 735 to the unlocked position (FIG. 27) and then manually latch the retract latch 732 in the proximal direction of the PD, as shown in FIG. 28

The various systems and mechanisms of retracting described in this document allow us to get rid of a number of drawbacks that we had to often encounter in the previously used retracting mechanisms used to retract actuators with an electric drive in surgical end effectors. For example, the various retractor mechanisms described herein may facilitate manual application of reciprocating movements to the drive elements and / or related drive mechanisms without any countering, usually occurring in gear / transmission mechanisms connected to the engine, while gear drives / transmissions remain motor-driven or physically driven.

Thus, in at least one example, a surgical instrument is considered, which may include a trigger member assembly that may contain a portion fixed for selective axial movement in the distal direction and proximal direction. The tool may further include a drive unit that includes a motor including the motor shaft. The gear assembly can be driven in a drive manner with the motor shaft and include an output shaft assembly that is adapted to interact with the trigger element assembly so that when the motor shaft is rotated in the first direction of rotation, a portion of the trigger rod assembly is driven axially in the distal direction, and when the motor shaft is rotated in the second direction of rotation, the portion of the starting element is driven axially in the proximal direction. The surgical instrument may further comprise a retractor unit that interacts with the trigger element assembly to manually report other rotational movements to the trigger element assembly in the second direction of rotation when the engine is turned off. The surgical instrument may further comprise a blocking means, which cooperates with the retractor unit, and a drive unit to prevent other rotational movements from being transmitted to the motor shaft while the gear assembly remains coupled to the motor shaft.

In accordance with another example, a surgical instrument may include a drive unit to provide starting and return movements. The tool may further comprise a surgical end effector that is configured to perform at least one surgical function in response to the application to it of at least one of the starting and return movements. The surgical instrument may further comprise a trigger element assembly, which may include a proximal portion of the trigger element, which is in functional interaction with the drive unit and is adapted to receive rotational movements from it. The trigger element assembly may additionally contain a distal portion of the trigger element, which is distally fixed at the proximal portion of the trigger element and adapted to transfer the trigger and return movements to the surgical end effector. The retractor assembly may be functionally connected to the proximal portion of the trigger element and the distal portion of the trigger element. The retractor unit may be adapted to selectively move between a non-activated position, in which the retractor unit is adapted to transfer start and return movements from the proximal portion of the trigger element to the distal portion of the trigger element, and the activated position, in which the distal portion of the trigger element is axially moved relative to the proximal portion of the starting element.

Another example of a surgical instrument may include a handle body in which an elongated stem assembly functionally associated with it is located. On the node of the elongated stem can be secured starting rod, made with the possibility of movement along the axis. The boot unit can be functionally connected with an elongated barrel and made with the possibility of contact with the starting rod. The drive tube can be mounted with the possibility of rotation in the body of the handle and functionally in contact with the starting rod. The surgical instrument may further comprise an engine that has an engine shaft. The engine can be functionally installed in the body of the handle and can be functionally connected to a power source. The gear assembly can be connected in a drive manner to the motor shaft and include an output shaft assembly that is capable of interacting with the drive tube so that when the motor shaft turns in the first direction of rotation, the drive tube causes the starting rod to move in the distal direction, and when turning the motor shaft in the second direction of rotation, the drive tube drives the starting rod in the proximal direction. The retractor unit can interact with the drive tube to apply other rotational movements manually to it in the second direction of rotation when the engine is turned off. The locking means may interact with the retractor unit and the gear unit to prevent other rotational movements being transmitted to the engine shaft while the gear unit remains connected in a driven manner to the engine shaft.

As shown in FIG. 1-3, in various embodiments, the implementation of the engine 100 of the surgical instrument 10 may be functionally connected to the trigger element, such as the trigger element 60, and may drive the trigger element 60 through the end effector or the OZB 20 during the starting process. For example, the trigger 60 may cut through the fabric and / or place brackets in the fabric during the starting stroke. For example, a battery may supply current to the engine 100, and the current supplied to the engine 100 may determine the torque generated by the engine 100. Moreover, the torque generated by the engine 100 may determine the starting force applied by the starting element 60. Voltage on the engine for example, it can determine the angular velocity of rotation of the engine 100, which can determine the speed of movement of the starting element 60. As shown in FIG. 63, the motor can determine the torque-voltage curve 5802. In various embodiments, the torque-voltage curve 5802 may have a maximum torque T ₁ at an optimized voltage V. At voltages that are, for example, higher and / or lower than the optimized voltage V, the torque generated by the engine may be less than the maximum torque T ₁ . For example, at a voltage of 1/2 V, the torque-voltage curve 5802 may have a torque value T ₂ , which, for example, may be less than T ₁ .

In various embodiments, a control system that is in signal communication with the engine can supply current from the battery to the engine. In some embodiments, the control system may include a speed control, which may regulate, for example, the speed of the starting element. The control system may include, for example, an ac resistance circuit and / or a voltage control circuit that can control the current and / or voltage supplied to the motor. In such scenarios, the implementation of the control system can adjust the torque and / or angular velocity of the engine, and thus the starting force and / or speed of movement of the starting element associated with the engine. For example, a voltage control circuit may control the voltage on the motor to affect the speed of the starting element. As shown in FIG. 63, if the voltage control circuit reduces the voltage from the ideal value V to 1 / 2V, for example, the torque can be reduced to T ₂ , which may be less than the maximum torque T ₁ , and the speed, for example, can be adjusted to the value S ₂ .

In various embodiments, the control system may include a pulse width modulation scheme, and the control system may provide current pulses to the motor. As shown mainly in FIG. 64 (a) -65 (b), current pulses can be applied at constant voltage. In various embodiments, the implementation of the load cycle of the pulses, i.e. the duration of the pulses during an interval or period, can affect the speed of the trigger element 5804. If the load factor of the load cycle is higher (FIG. 64 (a)), each pulse can be a longer part of the interval, and, as a result, the engine can drive the starting element 5804, for example, with a higher speed S ₁ . If the duty cycle of the load cycle is lower (FIG. 64 (b)), each pulse can be a shorter part of the interval, and as a result, the engine can drive the starting element 5804, for example, with a lower speed S ₃ . In various embodiments, the implementation of the pulse-width modulation scheme can provide for the transmission of current pulses to a motor at an optimized voltage V (FIG. 63) of the motor. In such scenarios, the implementation speed of the starting element 5804 can be adjusted without reducing the torque generated by the engine. For example, the engine can operate at an optimized voltage value V to create a maximum torque T ₁ , and the starting element 5804 can, for example, be driven through a terminal effector at a reduced speed, for example, at a speed like S ₃ and / or any suitable speed by varying the width of the voltage pulses.

In various embodiments, the battery may have a current-voltage limit or a power limit. In other words, a battery can transfer a limited amount of energy per unit of time. The battery power limit may be determined by the design of the battery and / or circuit. For example, thermal limitations of a battery and / or circuit, such as, for example, heat capacity and / or wire insulation, can affect the power limit. In addition, the limit of battery power may limit the amount of current supplied to the motor. In various embodiments, the implementation of the engine using the control speed control, such as, for example, pulse-width modulation, may not require the maximum current-voltage of the battery. For example, if a battery delivers current pulses at maximum or optimized voltage in order to actuate the trigger at the desired speed and maximum or optimized torque, additional current may not be used to drive the trigger. In such embodiments, additional current may be used to create additional torque. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a) -66 (s), the motor may include an additional or secondary set of coils, and additional current may be selectively supplied to an additional set of coils to create additional torque. In such scenarios, the implementation of the engine, for example, can create higher values of torque at lower speeds. In various embodiments, the control system can maximize the additional current supplied to the secondary set of coils, for example, depending on the battery's current-voltage limit. In addition, in certain embodiments, the control system may optimize the torque generated by the engine during at least part of the starting stroke.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a) -66 (s), the battery 6002 can selectively supply current to the engine 6004. The engine 6004 may, for example, include a primary set of 6006 coils and a secondary set of 6008 coils. In various embodiments, the control system 6020, which is in signal communication with the engine 6004, can selectively direct current to the primary set 6006 of coils and / or to the secondary set 6008 of coils. For example, the control system 6020 may supply current to the primary set of 6006 coils during the first operating state and may, for example, supply current to the primary set of 6006 coils and the secondary set of 6008 coils during the second working state. In various embodiments, a switch, such as a switch 6010, for example, can move between an open position and a closed position to selectively supply current, for example, to a secondary set of 6008 coils. In various embodiments, the implementation of sets of 6006, 6008 coils can be activated independently. In addition, the control system 6020 may include a pulse width modulation circuit 6022, and the battery 6002 may provide current pulses, for example, to at least one set of 6006, 6008 coils. In various embodiments, the implementation of the primary set 6006 coils may be connected to the first circuit 6030 (FIG. 66 (a)), and the second set of coils may be connected to the second circuit 6032 (FIG. 66 (a)), which does not depend on the first circuit 6030. In other embodiments, the implementation of the primary and secondary sets of 6006, 6008 coils can be connected, for example, in parallel (FIG. 66 (b)) or in series (FIG. 66 (c)). In some embodiments, the implementation of the engine 6004 may, for example, include at least one additional set of primary coils and / or at least one additional set of secondary coils.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the engine can create the first value of torque in the first operating condition and the second value of torque in the second operating condition. The second torque value, for example, may be greater than the first torque value. Moreover, the additional torque generated by the secondary assembly 6006 of the coils in the second operating state can prevent and / or limit the blocking of the starting element during the starting stroke. For example, as shown in FIG. 67, the motor may actuate the starting member distally during the first operating state and may drive the starting element proximally during the second operating state. In various embodiments, the implementation of the engine can create a larger torque when the starting element is pulled in than when the starting element is extended. In such scenarios, the implementation of the trigger element can be more effective. When a starting element is jammed, for example, if the fabric is too thick and / or hard to cut and / or staple with brackets using the starting element, additional torque, for example, can be used to retract the starting element. As shown in FIG. 66, the torque generated by the engine may gradually increase during the “soft” start phase of the 5902 starting stroke and / or may gradually decrease with the “soft” stop phase of the 5904 starting stroke. For example, when extending a starting element, the engine may incrementally or slowly increase the starting speed at the beginning of the starting stroke and may incrementally or gradually reduce the starting speed after the starting element passes the starting feed section. Moreover, in various embodiments, the engine can instantly or essentially instantaneously create maximum torque and / or speed when the starting element is pulled in. The engine may use the extra set of 6008 coils (FIG. 65 (a) - (c)) to achieve the maximum torque created, for example, at the start of the pull-in.

As shown in FIG. 68, the control system may regulate the movement of the starting element at a lower speed during the starting speed limit segment 5912. For example, when feeding a trigger element, such a trigger element may initially move at a slower speed to ensure the correct selection and / or placement of an end effector suitable for the target tissue. In addition, as described in more detail herein, the surgeon can actuate an actuator, such as a switch or button, to turn on the engine and initiate opening and closing branches of the end effector, moving the trigger element and / or articulated rotation, boot block. The beginning of a speed limit segment, such as the speed limit segment 5912, shown in FIG. 68, with the actuator turned on and at the beginning of the motor-driven operation, it may allow the surgeon to “check” the surgical procedure to ensure that the intended and / or proper surgical procedure is started. For example, in some embodiments, the first button may include an articulated turn in the first direction from the engine, and the second button may include an articulated turn in the second direction from the engine. If the surgical instrument is rotated and / or oriented upside down, the position of the first and second buttons can be rotated and / or reversed compared to the standard placement seen from the operator. If the first direction is the selected direction of the hinge rotation, it may be desirable to provide a hinge rotation of the loading unit in the first direction, i.e., that the first button is actually pressed during the speed limit segment. Similarly, if the second direction is the selected direction of the hinge rotation, it may be desirable to provide a hinged rotation of the loading unit in the second direction, i.e., that the second button is pressed during the speed limit segment. In certain embodiments, the rate limiting segment during the initial part of the surgical procedure may allow the surgeon sufficient time to modify and / or modify the surgical procedure if an unwanted surgical procedure has been initiated. As described in more detail herein, a pulse width modulation scheme, such as, for example, a pulse width modulation circuit 6022, can ensure that the speed limit segment is executed during the initial part of the surgical procedure.

As described above, the motor controller may be configured to use pulse width modulation to control the motor 6004. In various embodiments, the motor controller may use the same pulse width modulation, for example, for the primary set of 6006 coils and the secondary set of 6008 coils. In other embodiments, the motor controller may use a first pulse width modulation signal for a primary set of 6006 coils and a second, or different, signal of pulse width modulation for a secondary set of 6008 coils. In some cases, the motor controller may use a pulse-width modulation signal for one of the sets of 6006, 6008 coils, but not for another set of coils. Moreover, the information described in this document can be adapted for engines with more than two sets of coils. For example, a motor controller may use multiple pulse width modulation signals to control multiple sets of coils.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the engine can be a drive brush DC motor or, for example, a drive brushless DC motor. In some embodiments, the implementation of the engine may be a stepper motor, such as, for example, a hybrid stepper motor. Stepper motors can control the rotation in such a way that there is no need to use an angular rotation sensor. Failure to use the angle encoder can reduce costs and / or, for example, engine design complexity. As shown in FIG. 69 and 70, the motor may be a simplified stepper motor. For example, an engine may contain four electromagnetic poles spaced around the perimeter. As shown in FIG. 71-74 (s), the engine can be a hybrid stepper motor. A hybrid stepper motor may contain permanent magnets and, for example, variable magnets.

In the previously proposed designs of surgical instruments described, for example, in the publications Zemlok 763 and Zemlok 344, two separate engines were used. One engine, for example, is used to extend the drive element distally through the loading unit, which results in closing the stop, cutting the fabric and installing brackets from the cartridge with brackets located in the loading unit. The other engine is used to swivel the bootblock around the hinge joint. Additional information regarding the engines used in the hinge rotation mechanism of the boot block is also provided in US Pat. No. 7,431,188, the full contents of which are fully incorporated herein by reference. The use of two engines in such devices can increase the level of complexity and increase the total cost of a surgical instrument. For example, this kind of design can double the number of systems of retracting and other mechanisms, in the process of application of which failure is possible. In the surgical instrument 810 described in FIG. 29-31, a single motor is used, which can be selectively used to trigger and pivot the surgical end effector, configured to perform at least one surgical intervention in response to the starting movements applied to it.

For example, in at least one form, in a surgical instrument 810, many of the same components that were used in the various surgical instruments described in detail herein can be used. For example, the surgical instrument 810 includes a housing 12 in which the engine 100 is functionally housed, which is configured to provide rotational starting movements. The engine 100 is operatively associated with a gear assembly 820, which has an associated drive connector assembly 840, which is configured for selective installation and will be described in more detail below. Surgical instrument 810 may additionally include a swivel system, which is essentially referred to as element 859 and functionally interacts with the elongated stem assembly to apply the hinge rotation movements to the surgical end effector. For example, in one form, the swivel system 859 may include a swivel drive mechanism, generally referred to as element 860, which may be substantially similar to those of the swivel drive mechanisms described in Zemlok '763 and / or Zemlok' 344 publications. and / or US patent No. 7,431,188, except for the differences described below. For example, housing 12 may include a cylindrical portion 90 that includes a rotating member 92 mounted thereon. Rotating member 92 may interact with the proximal end of the elongated stem assembly to facilitate rotation of the elongated stem assembly relative to the housing 12. Rotating member 92 may functionally lock the handle swivel and slip clutch mechanism, as described in US Pat. No. 7,431,188. The main gear 94 of the hinge rotation of such a mechanism is represented by dashed lines in FIG. 29 and 30. The main gear 94 of the articulated rotation can be connected to the main shaft 95 by means of a slip clutch, as described in the above-mentioned US Pat. No. 7,431,188 so that the rotation of the main gear 94 of the articulated rotation will cause the corresponding rotation of the main shaft 95. described in this document, the knob can act as an indicator of the position of the articulation. The main shaft 95 functionally interacts with a J-shaped element 96, which functionally interacts with the proximal end of the articulation assembly 97. In one form, the hinge assembly 97 may comprise a proximal hinge thrust 98 that interacts with the hinge thrust 70 (FIG. 3) in the loading unit 20.

The swivel mechanism 860 may additionally include a swivel drive mechanism 870, which functionally interacts with the swivel main gear 94 and the drive connector assembly 840. As can be seen in FIG. 29 and 30, the pivotal drive mechanism 870 may include a pivotalized drive shaft 872, which is connected to the output of the drive connector assembly 840, as will be described in more detail below. The first drive gear 873 of the hinge rotation is connected to the drive shaft of the hinge rotation and is in gearing with the central gear track 875 on the second gear gear 874 of the hinge rotation, which can be rotated mounted on the rotating element 92. Therefore, the rotation of the first drive gear 873 of the hinge rotation to the rotation of the second Central gear 874 transmission swivel. As can also be seen in FIG. 29 and 30, the “third” gear 877 of the articulated shaft is mounted on the second shaft 876 of the articulated rotation, on which is located the “fourth” worm gear 878 of the articulated rotation. The third gear 877 of the articulated shaft is in gear with the second central gear 875 of the articulated transmission so that the rotation of the first driving gear 873 of the articulated rotation ultimately leads to the rotation of the third gear 877 of the articulated rotation and the second trunk 876 of the articulated rotation. The fourth worm gear 878 of the hinge rotation is in gearing with the main gear 94 of the hinge rotation so that the rotation of the fourth worm gear 878 of the hinge rotation leads to the rotation of the main drive gear 94 of the hinge rotation and eventually transmits the movements of the hinge rotation to the node 97 of the hinge. As will be described in more detail below, the swivel drive shaft 872 is rotated by the engine 100 if the drive connector assembly 840 is in the swivel control position.

As can be seen in FIG. 31, the engine 100 is operatively coupled to the gear assembly 820. The gear unit 820 may include a gearbox housing 822 that is connected to the engine 100. For example, the gear housing 822 may be connected to the engine housing 101 with screws 103 or other mechanical fasteners and / or fastening mechanisms. The gear unit 820 may include a planetary gear unit 821, which is operatively connected to the motor shaft 107. For example, in one installation, an annular gear 823 may be formed on the inner surface of the gear housing 822. The driving central gear 821 is connected to the engine shaft 107. The driving central gear 821 is in gearing with a plurality of first planetary gears 825, which are mounted on the first carrier of 824 planetary gears so that they are also in gear with the ring gear 823. The first central gear 826 is formed or otherwise fixed on the first carrier 824 planetary gears and is in gearing with the second planetary gears 828, which are mounted on the second carrier 827 planetary gears. The second planetary gears 828 are also secured in gearing with ring gear 823. The second central gear 829 is formed or otherwise mounted on second carrier 827 of planetary gears and is in gear with many third planetary gears 831. Third planetary gears 831 are on third carrier 830 planetary gears and gearing with ring gear 823. The third central gear 833 is formed or otherwise attached to an extension 832 of the shaft on the third carrier 830 planetary gears esterni and is in gearing with a set of fourth planetary gears 835, which are associated with a connector gear, which contains the fourth carrier 834 planetary gears, which is mounted with the possibility of rotation on the extension 832 of the shaft. In addition, the thrust bearing 836 can be mounted on an extension of the shaft 832 between the fourth planet carrier 834 of the planetary gears. A number of fourth planetary gears 835 are in gear with the output shaft unit 850, which is rotatably attached to the gear housing 822. As can be seen in FIG. 30, a second thrust bearing 836 may be installed between the fourth planetary gears and the output shaft unit 850. The fourth planetary gears 835 are in gearing with the toothed track 854.

In the exemplary embodiments, the output shaft block 850 is functionally associated with a clutch 230 of this type and design, as described in Zemlok ‘763, which is fully incorporated into this document by reference. Additional details regarding the design and operation of such a clutch 230 can be found in this publication. However, in an alternative embodiment, the clutch 230 can be replaced by a two stem connection or a sleeve that serves to connect the output shaft unit 850 directly to the drive tube 102.

As shown in FIG. 31, the main gear 837 of the hinge rotation is connected to the drive shaft 872 of the hinge rotation and is in gear with the external gear ring 838 on the fourth carrier 834 of the planetary gears. In various forms, the coupling drive unit 840 may additionally include a selector connector element 842, which is movably connected or otherwise mounted for displacement in the gearbox housing 822 or in another portion of the housing 812. At least in one design, connector element 842 the selector may consist of the first section 844 of the limiter of the drive shaft and the first section 846 of the limiter shaft articulated rotation. The first section 844 of the drive shaft stopper comprises a grooved, rough, etc. surface that is adapted to engage in a fixed engagement of the second section 845 of the drive shaft stopper on the output shaft unit 850. Similarly, the first portion 846 of the articulated shaft limiter comprises a grooved, rough, and so forth surface, which is arranged to engage the second portion 847 of the articulated shaft limiter on the fourth carrier 834 of planetary gears.

The operation of the connector assembly 840 will be understood with reference to FIG. 29 and 30. As can be seen in FIG. 29, the selector connector element 842 rotates to the hinge position, in which the first hinge shaft limiter section 846 is in fixed engagement with the second hinge rotation shaft limiter 847 section 8 on the output shaft unit 850. In this position, the rotation of the output shaft unit 850 around the longitudinal axis LA-LA is blocked. Therefore, in this position, the operation of the engine 100 will result in the rotation of the third central gear 833, which is in gear with the fourth planetary gears 835. The rotation of the fourth planetary gears 835 will result in the rotation of the fourth carrier 834 of the planetary gears, which can rotate freely. Such a rotation of the fourth carrier of the 834 planetary gears will also lead to the rotation of the primary gear 837 of the hinge rotation, which is connected with the drive shaft 872 of the hinge rotation. The rotation of the drive shaft 872 of the hinge rotation will cause the rotation of the first drive gear 873 of the hinge rotation and result in movement of the second transmission gear 874 of the hinge rotation. The rotation of the second gear gear 874 swivel leads to the rotation of the third gear gear swivel and the fourth worm gear 878 swivel. The rotation of the fourth worm gear 878 of the hinge rotation will drive the main gear 94 of the hinge rotation, which will cause the axial movements of the hinge rotation to apply to the thrusts 97, 70 of the hinge rotation, which ultimately will cause the hinge rotation of the loading unit 20 around the hinge joint. Turning the drive shaft 107 of the engine in the first direction of rotation will cause the hinge rotation of the loading unit in the first direction of the hinge rotation, and turning the drive shaft 107 of the engine in the opposite direction of rotation will cause the hinge rotation of the loading unit in the second direction of the hinge rotation opposite to the first direction of the hinge rotation.

As then shown in FIG. 30, the selector connector element 842 rotates to the drive or actuation position, in which the first portion 844 of the drive shaft stopper is in fixed engagement with the second portion 845 of the drive shaft stop on the fourth planetary gear 834 834. In this position, the rotation of the fourth carrier of 834 planetary gears around the longitudinal axis LA-LA is blocked. Therefore, in this position, the operation of the engine 100 will result in the rotation of the third central gear 833. The third central gear 833 is in gear with the fourth planetary gears 835 attached to the fourth carrier 834 of the planetary gears. Since the rotation of the fourth carrier 834 of the planetary gears is blocked by fixed engagement between the first portion 846 of the articulated shaft limiter and the second portion 847 of the articulated shaft limiter on the fourth planetary gear carrier 834, the rotation of the fourth planetary gears 835 will cause the output shaft unit 850 to rotate. The output shaft unit 850 may be connected to the drive tube 102 via the clutch unit 230 or by direct connection. Therefore, rotation of the output shaft unit 850 causes the drive tube 102 to rotate. As described above, turning the drive tube 102 results in axial movement of the trigger rod (not shown in FIG. 31). Rotation of the drive shaft 107 of the engine in the first direction of rotation will cause the distal extension of the starting rod, and rotation of the drive shaft 107 of the engine in the opposite direction of rotation will cause proximal movement of the starting rod. In various embodiments, the closure of the boot block 20, for example, when rotating the anvil assembly 22 relative to the holder 24, can connect and / or disconnect the engine 100 to the swivel system and / or the launch system of the surgical instrument 10. For example, closing the anvil assembly 22 relative to the holder 24 may disconnect the engine 100 from a swivel system, for example, from a pivotal drive shaft 872, and may connect the engine 100 to a starting system, for example, to an output shaft unit 850. Moreover, opening the stop assembly 22 relative to the holder 24 can disconnect the engine 100 from the starting system and can connect the engine 100 to the articulation system. In such scenarios, the implementation of the engine 100 may affect the hinge rotation of the loading unit 20, if the loading unit 20 is in the open state, and the engine 100 may affect the starting stroke of the starting rod, if the loading unit 20 is in the closed state. Surgical instrument 10 may, for example, comprise a sensor and / or selector. In some embodiments, the sensor may detect closure of the boot block 20. Moreover, the sensor may be in signal communication with a selector, for example, selector connector element 842. The selector may connect and / or disconnect the engine 100 from the swivel system and / or starting system when opening and / or closing the stop assembly 22 with respect to, for example, the holder 24. Various power-operated surgical instruments that use different drive connector mechanisms described in This document can be a significant improvement over previously proposed power-operated surgical instruments that use a variety of engines for articulated rotation. and the end effector and actuation of the drive element of the end effector.

For example, at least one surgical instrument contains an elongated stem assembly that defines the longitudinal axis of the instrument. The surgical end effector may be functionally connected to an elongated stem assembly for selective hinge rotation relative to it. The surgical end effector can be made with the possibility of performing at least one surgical intervention in response to the starting movements applied to it. A swivel system can functionally interact with an elongated stem node to apply swivel movements to the surgical end effector. The trigger element assembly can functionally interact with the elongated stem assembly to apply trigger movements to the surgical end effector. The surgical instrument may further comprise an engine that is configured to generate rotational starting movements. The drive connector assembly can interact with the motor and the swivel system so that if the drive connector assembly is in the first configuration, the engine will apply starting movements to the swivel system, which causes the surgical end effector to pivot about the longitudinal axis of the tool the drive is in the second configuration, the engine will apply starting movements to the starting element assembly, causing the starting element assembly induce at least one of the starting movements towards the surgical end effector.

Another example of a surgical instrument may include a handle in which an elongated stem assembly, functionally associated with it, is located, defining the longitudinal axis of the instrument. The boot block may be functionally connected with the node of the elongated stem and made with the possibility of cutting and stitching tissue with brackets in response to the starting movements applied to it. The boot unit may be configured to selectively pivotally rotate relative to the longitudinal axis of the tool around the articulation. The surgical instrument may additionally comprise a swivel system that contains a thrust swing assembly fixed to the elongated trunk assembly and adapted to functionally interact with the hinge joint portion in one element from the elongated stem assembly and the loading unit. The swivel drive mechanism can be mounted on the handle and interact with the swivel thrust unit in order to apply the starting movements of the swivel turn to it. The surgical instrument may additionally comprise a trigger element assembly, which functionally interacts with the loading unit to apply trigger movements to it. The engine can be functionally installed in the handles and can be made with the possibility of providing rotational starting movements. The drive connector assembly may come in contact with the motor and the swivel drive mechanism so that, if the drive connector assembly is in the first configuration, the motor will apply starting movements to the swivel system, which will cause the boot hinge rotation about the longitudinal axis of the tool, and the drive connector assembly is in the second configuration, the motor will report starting movements to the trigger element assembly, causing the trigger element assembly to apply, at least neck least one of the starting movements to the boot block.

In another example, the surgical instrument may comprise an elongated stem assembly that defines the longitudinal axis of the instrument. The surgical end effector may be functionally connected to an elongated stem assembly for selective hinge rotation relative to it. The surgical end effector can be made with the possibility of performing at least one surgical intervention in response to the starting movements applied to it. A swivel system can functionally interact with an elongated stem node to apply swivel movements to the surgical end effector. The trigger element assembly can functionally interact with the elongated stem assembly to apply trigger movements to the surgical end effector. The engine can be configured to create rotational starting movements. The surgical instrument may further comprise means for selectively applying output motion from the engine to each element of the swivel system and the trigger element assembly.

In some motorized surgical instruments, the motor may provide tactile feedback to the operator of the surgical instrument. For example, the rotation of the engine can create a vibration movement or noise, which, for example, may depend on the direction and / or speed of rotation of the engine. However, various types of motors can create minimal noise, and thus tactile feedback from the surgeon may be limited and / or the surgeon may simply not perceive it. For example, various modifications and / or improvements to the design of the engine and / or transmission may reduce the tactile noise generated by the engine and / or transmission. In such scenarios, it may be preferable to modify the engine and / or gear assembly, operatively associated with the engine, in order to create artificial and / or deliberate haptic feedback and / or other sensory feedback. In some embodiments, the implementation of a surgical instrument can provide feedback to the surgeon, and the surgeon does not need to take your eyes off the surgical field. For example, a motor and / or gear may provide tactile and / or audible feedback to transmit information to the surgeon. In such embodiments, the operator does not need to look at the display device, for example, to make sure that the surgical instrument is in a working condition or another state. As described in more detail in this document, a surgical instrument may transmit information about the direction of rotation of the motor, for example, which may correspond to the direction of operation of the trigger element and / or, for example, the direction of the hinge rotation of the loading unit. In addition, or alternatively, the surgical instrument can transmit information about the speed and / or position of the trigger element, for example, during the starting stroke, and / or about the speed and / or degrees of the angle, for example, the hinge rotation of the loading unit.

In various embodiments, as described in more detail herein, the engine may be functionally connected to the start-up node and / or the hinge node. As shown in FIG. 168, the engine 7010 may drive the engine shaft 7014, which, for example, may engage with the gear assembly 7020. In various embodiments, a key, such as a key 7016 on the motor shaft 7014, may engage with a portion of the gear assembly 7020. In some embodiments, for example, the gear unit 7020 may include disks 7022, 7024, the design of which may allow them to rotate or spin with the motor shaft 7014 when it engages with the key. For example, the first disk 7022 may include a groove (not shown). In addition, the first key (not shown) extending from the engine shaft 7014 may engage with a groove in the first disk 7022 so that the first disk 7022 rotates clockwise (CW) if the engine shaft 7014 rotates in the direction of CW, and rotates counterclockwise (CCW) if motor shaft 7014 rotates in the direction of CCW. In at least one embodiment, the first key may remain engaged with a groove in the first disk 7022 for the duration of the operation of the surgical instrument and / or its motor.

In some embodiments, the implementation of the first disk 7022 may be balanced relative to its axis of rotation, together with the motor shaft 7014. As shown in FIG. 168, a weight, for example, such as a weight 7026, may extend from the first disk 7022 and may shift the center of gravity of the first disk 7022 from the rotation axis of the first disk 7022. For example, the weight 7026 may extend away from the motor shaft 7014 and / or away the outer perimeter of the first disk 7022. In other words, the weight 7026 can disrupt the balance of the first disk 7022, lead to rotational imbalance of the first disk 7022 and, thereby, create centrifugal force when turning the first disk 7022 with the motor shaft 7014 Therefore, rotation of the first disk 7022 and the weight 7026 may provide tactile feedback, such as, for example, vibration or beating of the body of the surgical instrument and / or the handle. Tactile feedback may correspond to the operating state or operating conditions of the surgical instrument. Moreover, the tactile feedback created by turning the first disk 7022 and the weight 7026 may depend on the speed of rotation of the motor shaft 7014. In such embodiments, the starting speed and / or the speed of the hinge rotation can also, for example, be transmitted to the surgeon. For example, the first disk 7022 can create tactile feedback at a higher frequency if the motor shaft 7014 rotates faster, and at a lower frequency if the engine shaft 7014 rotates slower.

Similar to the first disk 7022 in some embodiments, the implementation of the second disk 7024 may be balanced relative to its axis of rotation with the motor shaft 7014. As shown in FIG. 168, a weight, for example, such as a weight 7028, may extend from the second disk 7024 and may shift its center of gravity. For example, the weight 7028 may extend away from the motor shaft 7014 and / or away from the outer perimeter of the second disk 7024. In other words, the weight 7028 may disrupt the balance of the second disk 7024, lead to rotational imbalance of the second disk 7024 and thus create a centrifugal force when turning the second disc 7024 with the motor shaft 7014. Therefore, rotation of the second disc 7024 and the weight 7028 may provide tactile feedback, such as, for example, vibration or beats of the body of the surgical instrument and / or the handle. Tactile feedback may correspond to the operating state or operating conditions of the surgical instrument. Moreover, the haptic feedback created by turning the second disc 7024 and the weight 7028 may depend on the speed of rotation of the motor shaft 7014. In such embodiments, the starting speed and / or the speed of the hinge rotation can also, for example, be transmitted to the surgeon. In various embodiments, the first and / or second disks 7022, 7024 may contain additional weights, for example, similar to the weights 7026 and / or 7028, which may additionally contribute to the formation of a tactile response, for example, the body of a surgical instrument and / or handle. Moreover, in some embodiments, the engine shaft 7014 may be in operative interaction with additional and / or other disks of the gear unit 7120 to selectively form additional and / or other tactile feedback.

As shown in FIG. 168, the second disk 7024 may include an inner perimeter 7026. In various embodiments, the second key 7016 may extend from the motor shaft 7014 and may engage in functional engagement with the second disk 7024 through the inner perimeter 7030. The inner perimeter 7030 may, for example, contain many flat surfaces 7032 and a plurality of arcuate surfaces 7034 between adjacent flat surfaces 7032. Each pair of flat and arcuate surfaces 7032, 7034 can define a groove, the structure of which can provide The second key 7016. In some embodiments, when the key 7016 is turned in the first direction, this key 7016 may abut the flat surface 7032 and be fixed and / or held in the groove of the second disk 7024. In this design, the second disk 7024 can be rotated in the first direction along with shaft 7014 engine. Moreover, in some embodiments, when the key 7016 is turned in the second direction opposite to the first direction, the key 7016 can be rotated by passing arcuate surfaces 7034, and can be fixed and / or held in the grooves of the inner perimeter 7030. In other words, the key 7016 can be rotated relative to the second disk 7024. In this design, the motor shaft 7014 can rotate in the second direction relative to the second disk 7024. Accordingly, the key 7016 may engage with the second disk 7024 and cause The second disc 7024 is rotated only if the motor shaft 7014 is rotated in the first direction. In some embodiments, the CW direction may correspond to the first direction, and the CCW direction may correspond to the first direction in other embodiments.

As described herein, since the engagement of the second disc 7024 may depend on the direction of rotation of the motor shaft 7014, the second disc 7024 can only be rotated if the motor shaft 7014 rotates in one direction, for example, if the motor 7010 actuates the starting element in one direction and / or rotates the loading unit in one direction. For example, the second disc 7024 can be rotated only if the engine 7010 pulls in the starting element, or, for example, rotates the boot block in the direction of CW. Such selective engagement of the second disc 7024 may affect the tactile feedback created by the surgical instrument. In other words, another and / or more tangible level of tactile feedback can be provided by selectively hooking the second disc 7024. For example, in those embodiments where the second disc 7024 is rotated only when the engine 7010 is rotated to retract the trigger element, During the process of drawing in, a more tactile feedback can be formed than in the process of extending the trigger element. In the process of engaging the second disc 7024, it can also contribute to the formation of haptic feedback, which can lead to more or substantially more summing up of the feedback forces. In such scenarios, the more tactile feedback created by the first and second disks 7022, 7024 may inform the surgeon that the starting element is pulled in by the engine 7010. In light of the above, in various embodiments the first disk 7022 can be rotated if the motor shaft 7014 rotates in one direction, and both disks 7022, 7024 can rotate if the motor shaft 7014 rotates in the opposite direction. Thus, the disks 7022, 7024 can provide the formation of different feedback if the motor shaft 7014 rotates in opposite directions.

As shown in FIG. 169, in some embodiments, the engine 7010 may drive the engine shaft 7014, which may engage with the gear assembly 7120. In various embodiments, the implementation of the key, for example, such as a key 7016 on the shaft 7014 of the engine, may engage with the node 7120 gear. Similar to gear unit 7020, gear unit 7120 may include a plurality of discs, for example, a first disc 7122 and a second disc 7124. The design of the first and second discs 7122, 7124 may allow them to rotate or spin with the engine shaft 7014 when selectively engaged with it key. For example, the first disk 7122 may include a groove (not shown). In addition, the first key (not shown) extending from the engine shaft 7014 may engage with a groove in the first disk 7122 so that the first disk 7122 rotates with the engine shaft 7014. In some embodiments, the implementation in the process of applying the first key may not get out of engagement with the groove of the first disk 7122. The second disk 7124 may contain an inner perimeter 7130 similarly, for example, to the inner perimeter 7030 of the second disc 7024. arcuate surfaces 7134. As described herein for FIG. 168, the key 7016 may selectively engage and disengage from the inner perimeter 7130 of the second disc 7124, depending on the direction of rotation of the motor shaft 7014. For example, if the motor shaft 7014 rotates in the first direction, the key 7016 may engage with the second disk 7124, causing the second disk 7124 to rotate with the engine shaft 7014. In addition, when the motor shaft 7014 is rotated in the second direction, the key 7016 may remain out of engagement with the second disc so that the key 7016 can be rotated relative to the second disc 7024 within its internal perimeter 7130.

In various embodiments, the first disk 7122 may include at least one prong 7126, and the second disk 7124 may also include at least one prong 7128. When you rotate the disks 7122, 7124, the teeth 7126, 7128 may touch elements of the generator 7140 sound feedback. For example, the teeth 7126, 7128 may be affected by the clickers 7142, 7144 of the audio feedback generator 7140. In various embodiments, the tooth or teeth 7126 of the first disk 7122 can touch and deflect the first clicker 7142 when the first disk 7122 turns, and the tooth or teeth 7128 of the second disk 7124 can touch and deflect the second clicker 7144 when the second disk 7124 turns , 7144 can cause resonant oscillations of clickers 7142, 7144 and the formation of an acoustic signal. In other words, rotating the first and second disks 7122 can create audio feedback. Moreover, the speed of rotation of the rotary disks 7122, 7124 and / or the number and placement of the teeth passing from the first and second disks 7122, 7124 can affect the frequency of the acoustic signal. For example, in such embodiments, the implementation of the engine speed and the corresponding starting speed of the starting element and / or the speed of the hinged rotation of the loading unit can be felt by the surgeon.

As shown mainly in FIG. 170 and 171, the geometrical parameters of the tines 7126, 7128 may influence the acoustic signals that are generated by the sound feedback generator 7140. For example, each of the teeth 7126, 7128 may include a non-damping surface 7150 and a damping surface 7152. The non-damping surface 7152 may, for example, include a flat surface, and the damping surface 7152 may, for example, include an arcuate surface. In various embodiments, if the non-damping surface of 7150 teeth 7126 rotates before the damping surface 7152 of teeth 7126 (FIG. 170), the resonant vibrations of the clicker 7142 can dampen and / or stop followed by the damping surface of 7152 teeth 7126. For example, the arcuate geometry of damping will may come into contact with a deflected clicker 7126 to prevent and / or limit the oscillations or resonance of the clicker 7126. On the contrary, if the damping surface 7152 of the tooth 7126 when turning the preceding There is a non-damping surface of 7150 teeth 7126 (FIG. 171), the resonant vibrations of the clicker 7142 will not be damped by the non-damping surfaces of 7150 teeth of 7126. For example, the flat geometry of the non-damping surfaces 7150 can move away from the contact and / or limit contact with the deflected clicker 7126 so that Opportunities are created and / or reduced for resonant oscillations of the clicker 7126. In other words, the direction of rotation of the disks 7122, 1724 and the corresponding teeth 7126, 7128 may affect the acoustic feedback created by chi urgicheskim tool. Accordingly, the operator of the surgical instrument can receive information about the operational status of the surgical instrument in the process of its application, and the surgeon does not need to take his eyes off the surgical field. For example, beeps may be damped when the trigger is pulled in and may not be damped when the trigger is advanced. In other embodiments, the audible signals may be damped when the trigger element is extended and may not be damped when the trigger element is pulled in. Moreover, in some embodiments, the implementation of damped acoustic signals may correspond to a hinge rotation of the loading unit in one direction, and undamped acoustic signals may correspond, for example, to a hinged rotation of the loading unit in another direction. In various embodiments, at least one audible feedback generator can be used alone and / or in combination with at least one tactile feedback system. Moreover, in some embodiments, the implementation of at least one haptic feedback system can be used separately and / or in combination with at least one sonic feedback generator. Sound and tactile feedback can inform the surgeon about various working conditions and / or, for example, provide the surgeon with duplicate feedback regarding such working conditions.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the surgical instrument can generate feedback if the starting element approaches the end and / or reaches the end of the starting stroke and / or if the loading unit approaches the limit of the hinge turn and / or reaches such a limit. In various embodiments, such feedback may differ and / or complement the feedback created during the start-up stroke and / or with the hinged rotation of the loading unit. Accordingly, the surgical instrument may inform the operator that the starting stroke, for example, is nearing completion and / or completed, and / or may inform the operator that the loading unit is approaching the hinge turn and / or has reached the hinge turn.

As shown in FIG. 172, the engine 7010 and the engine shaft 7014 may be in operative engagement with the articulated hub 7120, as described in more detail below. Moreover, the disks 7122, 7124 of the gear unit 7120 can come into contact with a sound feedback generator 7240, which can be, for example, similar to the sound feedback generator 7140. For example, the teeth 7126, 7128 on the disks 7122, 7124 may reject the clickers 7242, 7244 of the sound feedback generator 7240, causing the clickers 7242, 7244 to resonate and create acoustic feedback. In addition, the audible feedback generator 7240 may move or progressively move relative to the gear unit 7120. As described in more detail below, the audio feedback generator 7240 may selectively engage and / or break out of the clickers 7242, 7244 on the disks 7122, 7124 to selectively generate acoustic signals. In other embodiments, the engine, gear assembly, and / or its disks can be moved such that the teeth on the disks selectively enter and / or break from the clickers of the audio feedback generator to selectively generate acoustic signals.

In various embodiments, the sonic feedback generator 7240 may progressively move within the surgical instrument as the trigger member moves during the trigger stroke. For example, at the beginning of the starting stroke, the audio feedback generator a7240 may be offset relative to the teeth 7126, 7128 of the disks 7122, 7124. Moreover, as the starting element moves distally and / or approaches the end of the starting movement, the audio feedback generator 7240 may move to the combined position relative to the teeth 7126, 7128 of the disks 7122, 7124 and / or in this position. In such cases, the implementation of the generator 7240 sound feedback can create acoustic feedback, if the starting element is approaching the end of the starting stroke and / or reaches the end of the starting stroke. As shown, for example, in FIG. 173, the feedback generator may generate feedback if the trigger is in a range of positions near and / or at the end of the trigger, for example, to inform the surgeon about the position of the trigger. In such scenarios, the implementation of a surgical instrument may inform the surgeon about the completion of the starting stroke. For example, as shown in FIG. 172, at least one prong 7126, 7128 may be aligned with at least one clicker 7242, 7244, as the trigger element approaches the distal end of the trigger stroke. At this point in time, the surgical instrument can generate feedback so that it can inform the surgeon about the position of the trigger element. If each tooth 7126, 7128 is combined with one of the clickers 7242, 7242, a more tangible and / or other feedback can be transmitted to the surgeon. Moreover, when the trigger element is pulled in, at least one tooth 7126, 7128 can again go out of alignment with the clicker 7242, 7244 so that less tangible and / or other feedback can be transmitted to the surgeon. Accordingly, as the feedback generator moves during the starting stroke, the feedback generator can transmit various kinds of feedback to the operator depending on the position of the starting element. Moreover, the gear unit 7120 may include additional discs and / or teeth, which may enter and / or go out of engagement with the audible feedback generator 7240, and / or the acoustic feedback generator 7240 may include additional clickers, which may enter and / or break out of the teeth. In various embodiments, the sound feedback generator may inform the surgeon about alternative and / or additional positions of the trigger element. For example, a sound feedback generator may transmit acoustic feedback at a midpoint and / or at points of step-by-step movement along the starting path and / or the pull-in path.

As shown in FIG. 174 and 175, a feedback generator that can be moved, can also be used to inform the surgeon of the hinge rotation limit of the loading unit. For example, a sound feedback generator 7240 shown in FIG. 172, for example, can progressively move when the hinged rotation of the loading unit. For example, if the bootblock is in a configuration without a pivotal turn, the sonic feedback generator 7240 may be offset relative to the teeth 7126, 7128 of the discs 7122, 7124. Moreover, as the bootblock rotates, the sound feedback generator 7240 may move to the aligned position teeth 7126, 7128 disks 7122, 7124 and / or in this position. In such cases, the implementation of the generator 7240 sound feedback can create acoustic feedback, if the boot block approaches the limit of the hinge rotation and / or reaches the limit of the hinge rotation. For example, as shown in FIG. 174 and 175, the feedback generator can generate feedback if the trigger is in a range of positions near and / or at the end of the trigger, for example, to inform the surgeon about the position of the trigger. In such scenarios, the implementation of a surgical instrument may inform the surgeon about the limit of the hinge rotation. For example, as shown in FIG. 172, at least one prong 7126, 7128 may be aligned with at least one clicker 7242, 7244, as the boot block approaches its hinge limit, for example, approaches forty-five degrees. At this point in time, the surgical instrument can generate feedback so that it can inform the surgeon about the position of the trigger element. If the loading block approaches and / or reaches the hinge rotation limit, each tooth 7126, 7128 can be combined with one of the clickers 7242, 7244, and more tangible and / or other feedback can be transmitted to the surgeon. In addition, when the backward swivel rotation of the loading unit is in a neutral position without a swivel rotation, at least one prong 7126, 7128 can again go out of alignment with the clicker 7242, 7244 so that less noticeable and / or other feedback can be transmitted to the surgeon. Accordingly, as the feedback generator moves during the starting stroke, the feedback generator can transmit various kinds of feedback to the operator depending on the configuration of the boot block.

In various embodiments, it may be preferable to protect certain components of the surgical instrument from contact with liquids. For example, accidental contact with bodily fluids during application may damage the surgical instrument and may limit and / or shorten the life of the surgical instrument. Moreover, it may be preferable to protect certain components of the surgical instrument from contact with liquids during the sterilization process. For example, accidental contact with sterilizing and / or cleaning fluids can damage a surgical instrument and can interfere with and / or limit the re-use of a surgical instrument. In various embodiments, the implementation of certain components of a surgical instrument can be sealed and / or protected from contact with liquids. For example, the electronic components of a surgical instrument can be poured into epoxy to protect against liquids. Movable components of a surgical instrument, such as, for example, motor and / or gear assembly sections, can also be sealed and / or protected from contact with fluid. Such a seal, for example, may permit rotation of various moving components. Moreover, in various embodiments, such sealing can also facilitate heat transfer so that heat generated by the operation of a surgical instrument is dissipated with greater efficiency.

As shown in FIG. 185 and 186, in some embodiments, the engine 7510 and / or gear assembly 7520 may be sealed and / or protected from liquids during application and / or sterilization processing. The engine 7510, for example, may be similar to the engine 100, and the node 7520 gear, for example, may be similar to the node 170 gear. For sealing and protecting the engine 7510 around the engine 7510, for example, an engine housing, such as a rubber sleeve, can be placed inside the housing 12 (FIG. 1) of the surgical instrument 10 (FIG. 1). Such a rubber sleeve may limit heat transfer from the 7510 engine, and the 7510 engine may be subject to overheating. In other embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 185 and 186, the motor housing, for example, may include a double cover 7516, which may be located around the engine 7510. In various embodiments, the double cover 7516 may include at least two sections that can be connected by loops and / or for example, latch lock. A double-sided cover 7516 can rotate the engine 7510 and / or the motor shaft. In addition, in some embodiments, the implementation of the double cover 7516 may contribute to heat transfer from the engine 7510, enclosed within this cover. A contact system 7512 (FIG. 186), similar to contact system 210, for example, can be used to supply electric current to a 7510 engine. A contact system 7512 may include positive and negative ring contacts 7514a, 7514b (FIG. 186), which, for example may be functionally connected to fixed positive and negative contacts 7518a, 7518b (FIG. 186), for example, located on the double-sided cover 7516. Moreover, the double-sided cover 7516 may contain an o-ring or gasket 7519, which may For example, tighten the perimeter of the 7510 engine and seal the 7510 engine and the 7512 contact system inside the double cover 7516. In some embodiments, the double cover 7516 may contain metallic material that, for example, may contribute to heat transfer from the 7510 engine and may prevent overheating and / or engine failure 7410.

As shown in FIG. 185 and 186, the gear unit 7520 can be sealed and / or protected from liquids during application and / or sterilization processing. For example, a gasket 7522 may be located between the engine 7510 and the housing of the gear unit 7520 so that the engine 7510 and the gear unit 7520 form a hermetic, water tight seal. In addition, the sealing sleeve 7530 can be placed around the housing of the node 7520 gear. The sealing sleeve 7530 may include an edge 7536, which may abut against the double-sided cover 7516 and / or the engine 7510, in order to provide a hermetic waterproof seal between them. The sealing sleeve 7530 may also include a hole 7532 for the output shaft 7524. For example, the output shaft 7524 of the gear unit 7520 may pass through the hole 7532, and the ribs 7534 may extend to the output shaft 7524 to provide a sealed, watertight seal the shaft 7524 inside the hole 7532. In various embodiments, the sealing sleeve 7530 and / or the edges 7536, the gaskets and / or its ribs 7534 may contain rubber and / or other suitable material to form a sealed seal. onepronitsaemogo seal. In various embodiments, a mounting bracket or motor stopper 7540, for example, similar to stopper 190, can hold a hermetic gear assembly 7520 and motor 7510 inside housing 12 (FIG. 1) of surgical instrument 10 (FIG. 1).

In FIG. 32-37 presents another example of a surgical instrument 910, which may include many of the components of other surgical instruments described herein. In at least one form, the surgical instrument 910 may include a pivotal drive mechanism, substantially referred to as element 860, which may be substantially similar to those of the pivotal drive mechanisms that are described in Zemlok '763 and / or Zemlok' publications. 344 and / or US Patent No. 7,431,188, except for the differences described below. In other configurations, the surgical instrument may include various forms of other articulated rotational drive mechanisms as described herein. As can be seen in FIG. 32, the tool 910 includes a housing 12, which may include a cylindrical mounting portion 90 on which the rotating member 92 is mounted. The rotating member 92 is in contact with the proximal end of the elongated shaft assembly 16 to rotate the elongated shaft assembly 16 relative to the housing 12. This arrangement allows the clinician to selectively rotate the elongated stem assembly 16 and the associated loading unit 20 (or another form of surgical end effector) around the longitudinal axis LA-LA of the instrument. The rotating element 92 may be fixedly mounted on the cylindrical part 90, or its design may provide for the possibility of its selective disconnection.

As described herein, depending on the type and / or design of the surgical end effector used, it may be desirable to apply electrical current to the end effector. For example, the end effector can (can) use the sensor (s), the backlight, the executive mechanism (s) (s), for which operation requires power supply. However, in such constructions, the ability to rotate the surgical end effector around the longitudinal axis of the LA-LA instrument may be severely limited, since the system of conductors transmitting power to the surgical end effector or the loading unit through the elongated shaft from the power source can be seriously twisted and damaged. in cases where the elongated stem turns more than one turn. The various surgical instruments described in this document may use a conductor control system, essentially referred to as element 930, that can eliminate such problems.

As shown in FIG. 32, the surgical instrument 910 may receive power from the power supply 200. The power supply may, for example, be of the type described in more detail in Zemlok 763. For example, power supply 200 may contain a rechargeable battery (for example, lead, nickel, lithium ion, etc.). It is also contemplated that the power supply 200 may include at least one disposable battery. In at least one design, the voltage of a disposable battery may, for example, be from about 9 volts to about 30 volts. In FIG. 32 shows one example in which the power supply 200 includes a plurality of battery cells 202. The number of battery cells used may be dependent on the current demand of the tool 910. It is also possible that the power source may contain an AC source present in the operating room. For example, the power cord and external power connector (not shown) can be used to supply alternating current from the outlet in the operating room to various components, conductors, sensors, switches, circuits, etc. in the body of a surgical instrument and / or end effector. In other applications, surgical instrument 910 may receive power from, for example, a robotic system to which it is connected or with which it is otherwise connected.

As can be seen in FIG. 32, the conductor management system 930 may comprise a primary conductive element or wire 932 that is connected or otherwise interacts with the power supply 200 to receive power from it. Primary conductive element 932 is connected to a spiral, bobbin, and / or conductor winding assembly 934, which is fixed inside rotating member 92. In one design, for example, spiral conductor assembly 934 may be formed or may otherwise contain a flat conductor 936, which is wound , as shown, for example, in FIG. 36 and 37. For example, coiled conductor assembly 934 may be formed from a helically wound conductor that may have the same characteristics as a helically wound spring, such as a torsion spring, for example. In one form, conductor 936 may, for example, be wound in successive turns or turns, as shown in FIG. 36 and 37. In various designs, conductor 936 may be wound through one or more full revolutions. For example, conductor 936 shown in FIG. 36 and 37, made with the possibility of making more than four full turns.

In various forms, conductor 936 has a first end 938, which may, for example, be mounted on a cylindrical part 90 of housing 12. In addition, conductor 936 further has a second end 940, which is fixed or otherwise connected to rotating member 92 for rotational movement along by him. Thus, when the rotating member 92 is rotated in the first direction of rotation around the cylindrical portion 90, the helically wound conductor 936 is wound in a more dense manner. Conversely, when rotating the rotating element 92 in the second direction of rotation, the winding density of the helically wound conductor 936 may be weakened. In those configurations where the rotating member 92 is removably mounted on the cylindrical portion 90, the first end 938 of the spirally wound conductor 936 may be removably secured in a groove or other cavity 942 for mounting in the cylindrical portion 90. See, for example, FIG. 36 and 37. In addition, the primary conductive element 932 may be removably connected to the helix conductor assembly 934 by means of the connector assembly 933. In particular, the detachable connector assembly 933 may be used to connect the primary conductive element 932 to the first end 938 of the helically wound conductor 936 in order to allow the rotating member 92 to be removed from the cylindrical portion 90. In other designs where the rotating portion 92 is not intended to separate from The first end 938 of the helically wound conductor 936 can be fixedly fixed on the cylindrical part 90, and the primary conductive element 932 can be permanently fixed (for example, Soldering) at the first end of the spiral wound conductor 936.

The second end 940 of the spirally wound conductor 936 may be fixedly secured to the rotating member 92 using glue, mechanical restraints, latch elements, etc. In alternative embodiments of the design, the second end 940 of the spirally wound conductor 936 may be detachably fixed in the groove or other fixing member in the rotating element 92, in order to ensure the disconnection of the spiral wound conductor 936 from the rotating section 92. As can be seen in FIG. 32 and 33, the secondary conductive element 944 of the barrel is connected to the second end 940 of the coil wire 934. The secondary conductive element 944 of the barrel can be fixed inside the rotating element 92 and pass through the hollow node 16 of the elongated barrel. For example, the secondary conductive element 944 of the barrel may pass through the node 16 of the elongated trunk to its distal end to come into contact with other conductors, sensors, power components, etc., which are connected to a surgical end effector connected to it, a loading unit etc. Thus, when the doctor rotates the rotating element 92 relative to the housing 12, the spiral conductor assembly 934 and, in particular, the helically wound conductor 936 will be wound into a somewhat more dense spiral, simultaneously by providing power from the power supply 200 to the surgical end effector, loading unit, etc. If the doctor turns the rotating member 92 relative to the body 12 in the opposite direction, the spiral wound cable 936 will unwind somewhat while still providing power from the source 200 power supplies to various components, sensors, etc. on the surgical end effector, loading unit, etc.

As can also be seen in FIG. 34 and 35, the conductor control system 930 may also include a rotation limiter assembly, essentially referred to as element 950. In at least one design, the rotation limiter assembly 950, for example, contains a limiter element 952 that is attached to rotating member 92c. movable and made with the possibility of threaded engagement with the threaded section 99 on the cylinder 90 of the housing 12. Limiter 952 may include a pair of opposing protrusions 954, which are located on each side of the axial ribbed of portion 958 formed on the rotating member 92, as shown in FIG. 33. This design allows the limiter 952 to move along the axis inside the rotating element 92 as the rotating element 92 rotates on the cylindrical part 90 of the housing 12. The opposite end 960 of the limiter element 952 is configured to screw with the threaded section 99 of the cylinder 90. The proximal retaining wall 962 of the rotating element 92 and the inward distal retaining wall 964 serve to limit the distance of movement TD, to which the limiter 942 can move along the axis as n Turn the rotating element 92 on the cylindrical part 90.

In FIG. 33 shows a stop 952, which is approximately midway between the proximal retaining wall 952 and the distal retaining wall 954. In this position, rotating the rotating element 92 in the first direction relative to the cylindrical part 90 will cause the limiter to move axially in the distal direction DD until limiter 952 comes into contact with distal retaining wall 964, as shown in FIG. 34. Similarly, rotating the rotating member 92 in the opposite direction with respect to the cylindrical part 90 causes axial movement of the stop 952 in the proximal direction PD until it comes into contact with the proximal retaining wall 962 of the rotating member 92. Thus, this design limits the number full rotation of the rotating element 92 around the cylindrical part 90, to prevent accidental damage to the node 934 of the spiral conductor. For example, limiter assembly 950 may allow the physician to rotate the elongated stem assembly and, in particular, the rotating member 92, at least one full turn, but no more than, for example, three full turns around the cylindrical portion 90 in any direction. However, the number of revolutions or, more specifically, the scale of the rotational movement of the rotating element 92 on the cylindrical part 90 can be adjusted by changing the magnitude of the distance of movement TD.

In FIG. 33 shows the stopper 952 in a “neutral” or “central” position, with such a stopper centrally located between the distal locking wall 954 and the proximal locking wall 952. In at least one form, the bias elements 980 can be used to shift the stopper 952 to the neutral position , if the node 16 of the elongated shaft and the rotating element 92 are in the corresponding neutral position. If the doctor performs the rotational movement of the rotating section 92, the node 16 of the elongated stem will rotate in the manner described above. However, when the rotational movement of the rotating element 92 and the elongated stem assembly 16 is stopped, the displacement elements 980 will return the limiter 952 to the neutral position.

For example, at least one surgical instrument may comprise a housing, which may include a rotating member attached to an assembly portion of the housing, to rotate around it for a certain range of rotation. The elongated stem assembly, which defines the longitudinal axis of the tool, can be functionally connected to a rotating element for rotational movement with it around the longitudinal axis of the tool. The surgical instrument may further comprise a power supply and include a conductor control system. The conductor management system may comprise a conductor spool assembly, which may be mounted on a rotating member and may include a first end of the conductor, which is fixed to the housing mounting portion, and a second end of the conductor, which is fixed to the rotating member to rotate along with it a certain range. rotation. The conductor control system may further comprise a primary conductor, which may be fixed inside the housing and configured to transfer power from the power source to the conductor spool assembly. The stem conductor may be connected to the conductor spool assembly for transmitting power to the distal end of the elongated stem assembly.

Another example of a surgical instrument may include a housing in which there is a rotating element attached to the mounting portion of the housing. The surgical instrument may further comprise an elongated stem assembly that defines the longitudinal axis of the instrument and may be functionally connected with the rotating member for rotational movement with it around the longitudinal axis of the instrument. The surgical instrument may further comprise a power source and means for applying power from the power source through a conductor that passes through the elongated stem assembly. The surgical instrument may further comprise means of limiting the rotational movement of the rotating member around the mounting portion to a certain range of rotational motion, which contains at least one complete revolution, but not more than three full turns around the mounting portion.

As indicated in this document, an end effector can be mounted on a surgical instrument. As also indicated herein, a surgical instrument may comprise a starter actuator configured to push the staples out of an end effector including a staple cartridge. As shown in the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG.94, a surgical instrument 9000, for example, may include a handle 9010 with a body, a gripping section 9012, a starting actuator 9014, as well as an engine located inside the body. The surgical instrument 9000 may further comprise a barrel 9040, including a trigger bar 9020, which may be fed distally and / or retract proximally by means of a motor. In certain circumstances, the end effector may comprise a distal portion, which may pivotally rotate relative to the proximal portion around the articulation. In other circumstances, the end effector may not include a hinge joint. The surgical instrument may further comprise a pivotal drive, configured to pivotally rotate at least a portion of the end effector. As shown in the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 94, a surgical instrument 9000, for example, may include an actuator 9070 of a hinge rotation, which may be configured to drive the distal portion of the end effector around the hinge joint. The end effector shown in FIG. 94, i.e., the end effector 9060, is not an end effector made with the possibility of hinge rotation, however, in the design of the surgical instrument 9000 the end effector can be used, made with the possibility of hinged rotation. When using an end effector made without the possibility of an articulated rotation, such as, for example, an end effector 9060, with a surgical instrument 9000, operation of the actuator 9070 of the articulated rotation may not affect the operation of the end effector 9060.

In addition to the above, the end effector may include drive systems that correspond to drive systems of a surgical instrument. For example, the end effector 9060 may include a trigger element, which may be in functional interaction with the starting barrel 9020 of the surgical instrument 9000 in the case of installing the end effector 9060 on the surgical instrument. Similarly, the end effector may comprise a hinge rotation drive, which may be in functional interaction with the hinge rotation stem of a surgical instrument in the case of installing an end effector on the surgical instrument. Moreover, for example, the end effector 9060 may contain a proximal joint portion 9069, which may be associated with the distal stem 9042 of the trunk 9040 of the surgical instrument 9000 if the end effector 9060 is installed on the surgical 9000. In various circumstances, the end effector may require correct assembly of the joints, the drive system, and the swivel system of the end effector and the surgical instrument.

As shown in FIG. 94, the handle 9010 may include a trigger 9014, which, when actuated by the user of the surgical instrument 9000, may be configured to control the engine in the handle 9010. In various circumstances, the handle 9010 may include a controller that can be configured to detect the triggering hook 9014. In some cases, when triggering the hook 9014 is triggered, an electrical circuit may be closed which is in signal communication with the controller. In such cases, the controller may be configured to control the engine to extend the starting barrel 9020 distally and move the branch 9062 of the end effector 9060 to the branch 9064. In some circumstances, the handle 9010 may include at least one sensor capable of detecting force applied to the trigger 9014, and / or the angle to which the trigger 9014 deviates. The sensor or sensors may be in signal communication with the controller, and the controller can be configured to adjusting the motor speed in dependence on one or more signals from the sensors. The handle 9010 may contain a fuse 9015, which must be pressed before the controller turns on the engine in response to input from the trigger 9014. In various circumstances, the fuse 9015 may be in signal communication with the controller, and the controller may electronically block the use of the engine before until the fuse 9015 is pressed. The handle 9010 can also contain an actuator 9074 retracting, which when activated can cause the engine to operate in opposite direction to ensure retraction of the trigger rod 9020 and allow the take jaw of the jaws of 9062 9064. In various circumstances, closure of the circuit may occur at actuation of the actuator retracting 9074, which is in signal communication with the controller. In some cases, it will be necessary to press the fuse 9015 before the controller turns on the engine in the opposite direction in response to a signal from the actuator 9074 retracting.

Before and / or in the process of applying a surgical instrument 9000, such a surgical instrument 9000 and / or certain systems of a surgical instrument 9000 may cease to function, function impaired and / or fail. In certain circumstances, such violations and / or ways to eliminate them may not be obvious to the user of the surgical instrument, which can create serious problems for the user. Moreover, this kind of uncertainty can increase the time required to correct a violation or “error”. The design of the surgical instrument 9000 made improvements compared with the above structures. As shown in FIG. 94, the controller of the surgical instrument 9000 may be configured to detect the error of the surgical instrument 9000 and report such an error to the user of the surgical instrument 9000 through one or more indicators. The surgical instrument 9000 may contain one or more indicators that, when triggered by the controller, may indicate the nature of the error and / or otherwise draw attention to the surgical instrument system 9000, which in some way functions with impairments. For example, the surgical instrument 9000 may include an end effector indicator 9086, which, for example, may be configured to provide an indication that the end effector has not been installed on the barrel 9040 of the surgical instrument 9010. In various circumstances, the surgical instrument 9000 may contain a sensor can be configured to detect the installation of the end effector on the trunk 9040 and / or, respectively, to detect the absence of the installation of the end effector on the trunk 9040. The sensor may be stay in signal communication with the controller so that the controller can receive a signal from the sensor and confirm whether the end effector was installed on the trunk 9040. If the controller confirms that the end effector was not installed on the trunk 9040, the controller can turn on the end effector indicator 9086. In various circumstances, the end effector indicator 9086 may contain a light indication, such as for example a red light indication. In some circumstances, the end effector indicator 9086 may include an LED, such as, for example, a red LED. In addition or instead of the above, the surgical instrument 9000 may include a sensor that is in signal communication with the controller, which may be configured to detect whether the end effector installed on the 9040 barrel has been previously used. For example, such a sensor may be performed with the possibility of confirming that at least some of the brackets in the terminal effector have already been used and / or that the bracket installation element in the terminal effector has already been advanced. In such cases, the controller may include an end effector indicator 9086. Thus, the inclusion of the end effector indicator 9086 may signal the user of the surgical instrument 9000 that there is a certain error associated with the end effector, and that such an error should or should be eliminated before using the surgical instrument 9000. For example, FIG. 94, the reader will understand that the end effector indicator 9086 is located adjacent to the distal end of the trunk 9040 and that in various circumstances it can be placed on or near the distal section 9042 of the trunk connection 9040. In various circumstances, the end effector indicator 9086 may be placed on the end effector 9060. In any case, if the end effector indicator 9086 turns on due to the above, the user of the surgical instrument 9000 can quickly verify that there is an error and that such an error way connected with the end effector. Turning on the end effector indicator 9086 may indicate to the user the incompleteness of the end effector installation on the trunk 9040 and / or the need to replace the end effector.

In addition to or instead of the end effector indicator 9086, a surgical instrument may contain one or more indicators. For example, a surgical instrument 9000 may include a trigger indicator 9081. The trigger hook indicator 9081 may be in signal communication with the controller of the surgical instrument 9000 so that when the controller detects an error associated, for example, with the trigger drive of the surgical instrument 9000, the controller may turn on the trigger hook indicator 9081. As shown in FIG. 94, the trigger indicator 9081 can be placed adjacent to the trigger 9014. In such circumstances, the user of the surgical instrument 9000, seeing the trigger indicator 9081 triggered, can conclude that the error that occurred is related to the trigger drive, and can begin to identify the source of the error . In some circumstances, the controller may include a trigger indicator 9081, for example, if the battery of a surgical instrument 9000 fails for one reason or another. For example, if the battery voltage is below the desired level, such a battery will not control the engine as desired, and the trigger indicator 9081 may indicate, for example, that the battery needs to be replaced. In various circumstances, at present, the controller may block the operation of one or more operating systems of the surgical instrument 9000, if the controller includes an indicator, such as, for example, the end effector indicator 9086 and / or the trigger indicator 9081. For example, the controller may be configured to functionally disconnect the trigger 9014 from the engine, so that the triggering of the trigger 9014 does not work in the engine if, for example, the end effector indicator 9086 and / or the trigger indicator 9081 light up. Such functional disconnection of the trigger 9014 from the engine may also indicate to the user of the surgical instrument 9000 the error in the operation of the surgical instrument, and also signal that the user must check the indicators of the surgical instrument 9000 to determine the nature of such an error.

As shown in the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 94, the surgical instrument 9000 may comprise an actuator engagement indicator 9085 placed adjacent to the actuator actuator 9074. Similar to the aforementioned retractor actuator indicator 9085 may be in signal communication with the controller, and when the controller detects an error associated, for example, with the retractor drive, the controller may turn on the retractor actuator indicator 9085. In various circumstances, the controller may turn on the actuator engagement indicator 9085 if the fuse 9015 was not pressed before actuating the retractor actuator 9074. In such circumstances, the actuator indicator 9085 may serve as a reminder to depress the fuse 9015. Under certain circumstances, the surgical instrument 9000 may contain the fuse indicator 9082 placed adjacent to the fuse 9015. In some circumstances, the surgical instrument controller 9000 may turn on the fuse indicator 9082 if the user actuates actuator 9074 to retract before actuating fuse 9015. Indicator The 9082 fuse may be in signal communication with the controller, and when the controller detects that, for example, the starting system cannot be switched between the starting mode and the pull-in mode, the controller may turn on the fuse indicator 9082. Surgical instrument 9000 may include an indicator 9084 actuator swivel, placed adjacent to the actuator 9070 swivel. Similarly to the above-described indicator 9084 actuator articulated rotation can be in signal communication with the controller, and when the controller detects an error associated, for example, with an articulated rotation, the controller may include indicator 9084 actuator articulated rotation. The surgical instrument 9000 may include a barrel indicator 9083 placed adjacent to the barrel connection, configured to mount the table 9040 on the handle 9010. Similarly to the barrel indicator 9083 described above, it may be in signal communication with the controller, and when an error is detected by the controller, for example, barrel 9040, the controller may include an indicator 9083 rod.

As shown in FIG. 95, the surgical instrument 9100 may include a handle 9110 with a set of indicators 9190, configured to provide the user of the surgical instrument 9100 with an indication of the presence of one or more errors associated with the surgical instrument 9100 and / or an end effector connected with it. The set of indicators 9190 can be located in any convenient way. In various circumstances, a set of indicators 9190 can be placed with the reproduction of a shape or an approximate shape, for example, a surgical instrument 9100 and / or an end effector connected to it. In at least one case, the outer surface of the handle 9110 may, for example, contain an image of a surgical instrument 9100 and / or an end effector connected to the surgical instrument. The set of indicators 9190 can be placed in accordance with the general outlines of the surgical instrument and the end effector so that, for example, indicate that portion of the surgical instrument 9100 and / or the end effector where an error occurs, an error is recorded and / or where necessary check to correct the error. For example, the overall shape can be demarcated in such a way as to display the end effector 9060, the barrel 9040, the handle 9010, the trigger hook 9014, the fuse 9015, the return actuator 9074 and / or the actuator 9070 of the hinge rotation. For example, in various circumstances, the end effector indicator 9192 may be placed adjacent to the end effector 9060 image, the trunk indicator 9193 may be placed adjacent to the trunk image 9040, the trigger indicator 9191 may be placed adjacent to the trigger image 9014, the fuse indicator 9195 may be located adjacent to the image fuse 9015, indicator 9196 of the return actuator can be placed adjacent to the image of the return actuator 9074, and / or indicator 9194 the actuator articulated rotation can be placed adjacent to the image of the actuator 9070 articulated rotation. In different circumstances, each of the indicators 9191, 9192, 9193, 9194, 9195 and / or 9196 may contain an LED. In some circumstances, each LED may contain a red LED that may be turned on by the controller to indicate the presence of an error. In various circumstances, the controller can be configured to turn on the pulse indication of the LED, which can reduce the time required for the user to notice the operation of the indicator. In certain circumstances, each indicator may include an LED that can emit light in more than one color. In some circumstances, each such LED may be configured to selectively emit, for example, red light and green light. The controller can be configured to turn on the green LED if no errors were detected in the corresponding portion of the surgical instrument 9100 and / or the end effector installed on it, or alternatively red, if an error was detected in the corresponding portion of the surgical instrument 9100 and / or installed on it is the end effector.

In some circumstances, as described in more detail below, the controller of the surgical instrument 9000 can block one or more actuators of the surgical instrument, such as a trigger 9014, an actuator 9074 for retracting and / or an actuator 9070 for articulated rotation, if the controller includes one or another indicator associated with such an actuator. For example, the controller may block the trigger 9014 if it turns on the trigger indicator 9081, the pull actuator 9074 if it turns on the pull actuator indicator 9085, and / or the swivel actuator 9070, if it turns on the twist actuator indicator 9084. The handle 9010 of the surgical instrument 9000, for example, may include a trigger guard that can be configured to selectively “lock” the trigger 9014 and prevent the trigger hook 9014 from functioning. tool. In at least the same circumstances, it is not possible to allow the trigger 9014 to close the trigger switch. In certain circumstances, the controller of the surgical instrument 9000 may be configured to electronically lock the trigger 9014, i.e., in addition to the trigger guard, the power supply of the battery to the engine is stopped. In such circumstances, electronic locking and mechanical locking may duplicate each other; however, a mechanical interlock can transmit a feedback signal to the user of the surgical instrument 9000 about the function of disabling the starter drive. As indicated above, the controller of the surgical instrument 9000 may also provide feedback, for example, by using the trigger indicator 9081. Thus, a haptic feedback signal and / or visual feedback about the occurrence of an error can be transmitted to the user of the surgical instrument 9000. In some circumstances, a tactile feedback signal may cause the user of surgical instrument 9000 to start looking for a visual feedback signal. For example, the user may attempt to trigger the trigger 9014, and if the user fails to activate the trigger 9014, he can then inspect the instrument for triggered indicators. In any case, after correcting the error, the controller can unlock the trigger 9014 by turning off the trigger fuse.

As shown in FIG. 100, the surgical instrument 9000 may include a trigger guard 9390, which may be configured to lock the trigger 9014. The trigger guard 9390 may switch between a locked state, which is shown in FIG. 100, 101 and 103, and an unblocked state shown in FIG. 102. If the end effector is not installed on the barrel 9040 of the surgical instrument 9000, the trigger hook 9390 may be shifted toward its locked state. In such a locked state, the trigger lock fuse 9330 may prevent or at least substantially prevent triggering of the hook 9014. In particular, the trigger lock fuse 9390 may include a gear rack 9391 of the barrel, a gear 9392 and a gear rack 9393 of the handle, and also a bias element, for example, such as a spring, which can be made with the possibility of displacement of the gear rack 9391 of the trunk in the proximal position, and the gear rack 9393 of the handle in the lower position. The proximal position of the toothed rack 9391 of the barrel and the lower position of the gear rack 9393 of the handle are shown in FIG. 101. As shown mainly in FIG. 101, the handle rack 9393 may include holes 9396, and the trigger 9014 may include protrusions 9395 which, when the gear rack of the handle is in its lower position, are not aligned with the holes 9396. In particular, the trigger 9014 may contain a toggle switch the hinge axis 9397, while at the location of the handle 9393 in its lower position, turning the trigger 9014 will force at least one of the protrusions 9395 extending from the start hook 9014 to abut the handle gear 9393 and prevent full trigger trigger 9014.

If an end effector is installed on the trunk 9040, then, in addition to the above, trigger guard 9390 can move between its locked configurations and its unlocked configuration. In the unlocked configuration of the trigger fuse 9390, as shown mainly in FIG. 102, the handle rack 9393 may be in its upper position. In the upper position of the toothed rack 9393, the handle holes 9396 in the gear rack 9393 are aligned with the protrusions 9395 extending from the trigger 9014. In such circumstances, the trigger 9014 can switch to trigger the hook 9014. In particular, the projections 9395 can pass through the holes 9396, providing the ability to switch the trigger 9014 around the axis 9397 hinge. Thus, in the light of the above, moving the toothed rack 9393 of the handle between its lower and upper positions respectively blocks and unlocks the trigger 9014. Various mechanisms can be used to move the handle toothed rack 9393 between its lower position and its upper position. In at least one such embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, barrel 9040 may include a start blocking actuator 9399, which can be displaced proximally by the action of an end effector if the end effector is installed on the trunk 9040. Barrel rack 9391 can be installed and / or pass proximally from start blocker 9399 and can contain teeth 9391a formed on its surface. The teeth 9391a may engage in gearing with the teeth 9392a on the gear 9392 so that when the starting locking actuator 9399 and the gear rack 9391 are proximally moved, the gear 9392 can rotate around its axis. Accordingly, the gear rack 9393 of the handle may include the rack teeth 9393a formed on its surface, which also engage in gear teeth with the gear teeth 9392a, and thus, when the gear rack 9391 of the trunk moves proximally, the handle 9393 of the handle can move from its lower position in its upper position, thus removing the lock of the trigger 9014. To return the gear rack 9393 of the handle to its lower position, the gear rack 9391 of the barrel can be moved distally to rotate the gear to 9392 Forest in the opposite direction. In various circumstances, the rack rail 9391 of the trunk can move distally as a result of removing the end effector from the trunk 9040.

As shown in FIG. 96-97, the handle 9010, for example, may include a trigger fuse 9290. The trigger guard 9290 may include a housing 9291, a locking pin 9292 configured for deployment, a latch 9293, and a biasing element 9294 configured to move the locking pin 9294 between the non-deployed position shown in FIG. 96 and 98, and the unfolded position shown in FIG. 97 and 99. In various embodiments, the latch 9293 may be formed from a heat-sensitive material that is susceptible to heat. In at least one such case, the heat-sensitive material may be adapted to transition between a solid material and a fluid, such as, for example, a liquid, a suspension and / or a gas, and / or, for example, between a solid material and a semi-solid material. When a temperature-sensitive material transitions or at least partially transitions between a solid state and a flowing state, the latch 9293 can release the locking pin 9294 to lock the trigger and / or any other suitable trigger mechanism of the handle 9010. In various cases, when deployed, the locking pin 9294 can smoothly step behind the trigger and / or otherwise interact with it. The handle may include any suitable number of fuses 9290 trigger mechanism, etc., for selectively blocking any suitable number of triggers and / or, for example, buttons. The reader will understand that the fuse 9290 trigger mechanism can be performed without the possibility of dropping. In such embodiments, the actuator trigger guard 9290 may permanently block, for example, the handle trigger so that the use of the tool becomes impossible. Permanent locking of the trigger and / or any other trigger of the tool may mean that using the tool is absolutely impossible, although in other circumstances a permanent lock cannot be reset immediately and a tool may need to be transferred, for example, to a qualified technician or to a special institution where whether the instrument is to be repaired and used later or the instrument should be disposed of. When at least partially converting the heat-sensitive material of the retainer 9293 into a liquid, a technician can assume that the tool has been exposed to temperatures above the transition temperature of the heat-sensitive material. In various embodiments, the transition temperature of the heat-sensitive material may be the temperature at which a solid material, for example, turns into a liquid, evaporates and / or sublimates. In any case, the heat-sensitive material and, thus, the junction transition temperature of the fixer 9293 can be chosen so that the release of the locking pin 9294 may indicate that the surgical instrument has been exposed to a temperature above a certain threshold temperature. In various cases, a surgical instrument may be damaged due to exposure to excessive temperature. For example, a surgical instrument may include solid electronic components that may be damaged by exposure to such an excessive temperature. In such cases, the threshold instrument temperature and junction transition temperature of 9293 may be equal to or at least substantially equal, and, as a result, it can be assumed that the instrument was not exposed to a temperature higher than the threshold temperature if the trigger protector 9290 was not triggered, and accordingly, the instrument was exposed to a temperature above the threshold temperature if the trigger protector 9290 was triggered, and thus irurgichesky tool could be damaged, or, at least, it should be checked for damage.

In addition to the above, when a surgical instrument is sterilized, it can be twitched to temperatures above the threshold temperature and / or transition temperature. Many sterilization procedures are known, some of which include the step of heating a surgical instrument. In addition to or instead of the trigger protector 3290, the surgical instrument may include at least one temperature sensor capable of evaluating the temperature to which the surgical instrument is exposed. In various cases, the temperature sensor or sensors can exchange signals with a surgical instrument controller, which can be configured to assess whether a surgical instrument has a temperature above the threshold temperature. In at least one such case, the controller may include a microprocessor and an algorithm to evaluate the signals received from the temperature sensor or sensors. If the controller determines that the threshold temperature is reached and / or exceeded, the controller may permanently interfere with the operation of the instrument. In other words, the controller can provide electronic blocking of the surgical instrument. Similarly to the above, permanent tool locking may mean that using the tool is absolutely impossible, although in other cases permanent locking cannot be reset immediately, it may be necessary to transfer the tool, for example, to a qualified technician or to a special institution, where they can assess whether the tool is to be restored and subsequent application or instrument should be disposed of. The reader will understand that when sterilizing a surgical instrument, a power supply is required for the operation of the controller and / or sensors of the surgical instrument. Several embodiments of surgical instruments include a removable battery or a power source that can be removed before sterilizing a surgical instrument, and in such cases, for a removable battery, sterilization and / or treatment is carried out separately. After removing the removable power supply from these tools described above, as the reader will understand, the controller and / or sensors may not receive enough energy to monitor the temperature of the surgical instrument. Embodiments of the surgical instruments described herein may include a battery or a power source that are not removed from the surgical instrument during its processing. Such a battery can be known as a permanent battery, since it can power the controller and / or temperature sensors during the instrument sterilization process. In various embodiments, a tool including a permanent battery may also include a removable and / or rechargeable battery. In any case, the instrument may have sufficient power to detect and record the temperature to which it is exposed. In at least one case, the instrument controller may include a memory chip configured to store temperature readings, for example, in a temperature register. In various circumstances, the controller can record the sensor readings periodically, i.e. with a certain sampling frequency. In some cases, the controller can be designed so that when registering temperature readings exceeding a certain temperature, although below the threshold temperature, the controller can increase the sampling rate. In some cases, the controller can be designed so that when sequentially recording temperature readings that are below a certain temperature, the controller can reduce the sampling rate, for example, back to the original sampling frequency.

In FIG. 99A shows the algorithm for the controller. In some cases, this algorithm may contain a procedure for starting a surgical instrument, for example, when using a surgical instrument for the first time after sterilization. The start-up procedure can begin after switching on the tool. The tool can turn on automatically after installing the end effector on the tool. In at least one case, when an end effector is mounted on a surgical instrument, a switch closes, exchanging signals with the controller. In addition or instead of the above, switching on of the tool can occur, for example, after pressing the button and / or switch on the handle. In any case, the controller can then evaluate the temperature readings stored on the memory chip described above. For example, the controller can evaluate whether any of the stored temperature readings are equal to or greater than the threshold temperature. If the controller determines that all stored temperature readings are below the threshold temperature, the controller can continue the normal execution of the start-up procedure. If the controller determines that one or more of the stored temperature readings are equal to or exceed the threshold temperature, the controller may continue to perform an alternative procedure. In at least one example, the controller can completely disable the instrument, for example, by electronic locking and / or mechanical locking, as described in this document. In some other cases, the controller may allow the use of a tool, even if the controller determines that one or more of the stored temperature readings are equal to or exceed the threshold temperature. The controller can save this definition in its memory and / or inform the user that the threshold temperature has been exceeded via the screen, for example, using an LED, and then continue with its normal start-up procedure. In various cases, the controller may consider the threshold temperature as an absolute maximum, i.e., one temperature reading equal to or exceeding the threshold temperature is sufficient to start an alternative start program or completely block the tool. In other cases, the controller can be configured to assess whether a thermogram in which temperature readings are equal to or higher than the threshold temperature is sufficient to start an alternative start-up program or completely block the instrument, since both time and temperature can be factors take into account when assessing the probability of damage to the instrument, for example, during sterilization.

 As shown in FIG. 104-109, a surgical instrument, such as a surgical instrument 9000, for example, may include a handle 9410, including a trigger guard fuse system 9490. The handle 9410 may be similar to the handle 9110 in many aspects, and for brevity, these aspects will not be repeated here. Similarly to the above, the trigger guard fuse system 9490 can be configured to lock and release the trigger hook 9414. Also similar to the aforesaid, the trigger hook fuse system 9490 can be switched to a locked state when the end effector is not installed on the trunk 9040 of the surgical instrument, as shown in FIG. 104-107, and can be transferred to the unlocked state, when the end effector is fully installed on the barrel 9040, as shown in FIG. 108 and 109. When installing the end effector on the barrel 9040, in addition to the above and as shown mainly in FIG. 108 and 109, the end effector can push the sensitive element 9499 proximally. The sensing element 9499 can pass through the trunk 9040 from the distal end of the trunk 9040 to its proximal end. In the process of application, the end effector can rest against the distal end of the sensitive element 9499 when the end effector is mounted on the barrel 9040 and push the sensitive element 9499 proximally, as indicated above. When pushing the sensitive element 9499 proximally, as shown in FIG. 108 and 109, the sensitive element 9499 can contact the swing arm 9486 of the trigger guard system 9490 and rotate the swing arm 9486 upwards. The swing arm 9486 may include an end that is rotatable and secured to the handle body by means of a pin 9487, configured to allow the swing arm 9486 to rotate about an axis. The swing arm 9486 may further comprise a cam follower portion 9488 with which the sensitive element 9499 can contact. During application, the sensitive element 9499 can move the swing arm 9486 between the lower position and the upper position to move the trigger guard system 9490 between the locked position and the unlocked position accordingly. The trigger guard fuse system 9490 may additionally include a locking pin 9485 attached to the rocker arm 9486, which may be raised upward when the rocker arm 9486 is turned upwards and downward when the rocker arm 9486 is downward, respectively. The locking pin 9485 may include an upper end pivotally mounted on the swing arm 9486 and a lower end that passes through the hole 9483 formed in the trigger hook 9481 when the locking pin 9485 is in the lower position. In various circumstances, the hole 9483 may be formed in the lever 9482 extending from the trigger hook 9414. When placing the locking pin 9485 in the hole 9483, the trigger hook 9414 cannot rotate around its support point 9484, and therefore the user cannot bring the trigger hook 9414 into act. When the locking pin 9485 is in the upper position, the locking pin 9485 cannot be located in the hole 9483, and therefore, the user can activate the trigger 9414. When the end effector is disconnected from the barrel 9040, the sensitive element 9499 can be moved from the proximal position to its distal position. In other words, if the end effector is not attached to the barrel 9040, a biasing element, such as spring 9489, for example, can move the rocker arm 9486 down and, accordingly, shift the trigger guard system 9490 to a locked state. In addition, the spring 9489 can exert a biasing force to the sensitive element 9499 by means of the lever 9482 and push the sensitive element 9499 distally when the end effector is not mounted on the barrel 9040.

In addition to the above, the operation of the sensitive element 9499 and the trigger guard fuse system 9490 can serve as a means of interaction with the user of the surgical instrument. For example, when the end effector is not mounted on the trunk 9040, the sensitive element 9499 is offset distally, and the trigger 9414 will be blocked, and when the user attempts to bring the trigger 9414 into action, the user will quickly realize that the surgical instrument triggering system is not functioning correctly. In this example, the user will quickly realize that to use a surgical instrument, it is necessary to install an end effector on the barrel of 9040. In various circumstances, the trigger can be blocked if the end effector has already been used, even if it is attached to the barrel of 9040. At least in such Under circumstances, the end effector may include a trigger element, which, when placed in its most proximal position, can push the sensing element proximally when the end effect is set torus per barrel 9040; however, if such a trigger element is already at least partially extended, when the end effector is mounted on the barrel 9040, the sensing element may not be pushed proximally, and therefore the trigger hook may remain blocked. And in this case, such a trigger fuse may indicate to the user that there are problems with the starting drive, namely that under these circumstances the end effector has already been used. In the absence of such a tactile lock, the user will be confronted with circumstances in which he will be able to press the actuator, and the surgical instrument will not respond to pressing the actuator, which may confuse the user.

As described above, when installing a previously unused end effector on the barrel of 9040, the sensing element can move proximally, releasing the trigger. In various circumstances, the sensing element and the trigger fuse system can be designed so that the trigger can not be unlocked until the end effector is completely installed on the trunk of the 9040. If the end effector is installed on the trunk of the 9040 only partially, sufficient displacement of the sensing element required to release the trigger. And in this case, such a lock of the trigger can indicate to the user that there are problems with the starting drive, namely, in these circumstances that the end effector is not fully installed on the barrel of 9040.

As described above, the end effector may be mounted on a surgical instrument, which may include a controller configured to identify the end effector. In some cases, the controller may be configured to evaluate the identity of the end effector when the controller is activated. In some cases, as shown in FIG. 176, the controller can be activated when the battery is inserted into the handle. In addition or instead of the above, the controller may be configured to perform an assessment of the state of the surgical instrument when the controller is activated. For example, the controller may be configured to estimate the position of the closing element of the locking system, the position of the starting element of the drive system, and / or the position of the hinge element of the swivel system. In some cases, the surgical instrument may include an absolute positioning sensor for detecting the position of the trigger element. Such a sensor is described in US Patent Application No. 13 / 803,097, entitled “SURGICAL TOOL, PERFORMED WITH THE POSSIBILITY OF A HINGE, AND CONTAINING A STARTING DRIVE,” filed on March 14, 2013, which is fully incorporated herein by reference. In some cases, a surgical instrument may include a turn-off recorder. Such a stroke recorder may contain a mechanical switch, a counter and / or relays and / or an electronic switch, a counter and / or relays, including data stored in volatile memory. In such an embodiment, the controller may evaluate whether the previous start-up was completed. Such embodiments may be useful in a variety of situations. For example, the controller may be accidentally turned off and / or the power supply may be interrupted during surgery, and upon reactivation, the controller may not be able to assess whether the tool is running for the first time or the tool is in the middle of the previous start-up. The end-of-turn recorder helps the controller to distinguish between these two events. In addition, the end-of-stroke recorder, which does not turn off or does not restart in the event of a tool power loss or interruption, allows the controller to assess whether the power supply to the surgical instrument has stopped during the start-up stroke. If the controller determines that the previous start-up has not been completed, the controller can be configured to, firstly, allow the motor to be energized to complete the starting and / or secondly, allow the motor to be energized to retract the starting element the closing element and / or the hinge element in their original or non-activated position. In various cases, the controller may offer the user of the surgical instrument the option of continuing the starting stroke or returning the mechanical systems and / or the electrical systems of the instrument to their original or non-activated positions. In such embodiments, the surgical instrument cannot automatically return these systems to their original or non-activated positions. In any case, after returning the surgical instrument to its original or non-activated state, the previously activated end effector can be removed from the surgical instrument and / or the non-activated end effector can be installed on the surgical instrument. In various cases, as indicated herein, the surgical instrument may then identify or at least attempt to identify the non-activated end effector.

As shown in FIG. 177, the surgical instrument controller may perform a diagnostic test of the instrument and / or the battery. For example, after activating a controller, a surgical instrument can assess whether a surgical instrument has been exposed to temperatures above the threshold temperature of the surgical instrument, as described in this document. Thus, for example, a surgical instrument can evaluate the available power supply, voltage and / or battery current, as described in this document. If the tool fails one or more of these diagnostic checks, the controller may not energize the engine, physically block the tool, and / or point the user to a negative check result. In such circumstances, the tool can record such negative results in the memory so that these checks can help the technician in the subsequent evaluation of the tool. Assuming that the tool passes these diagnostic tests, the tool, similarly to the above, can register test data associated with passing diagnostic tests. In either case, the tool can then continue to evaluate whether the tool is in its original or unactivated state and identify the end effector. As indicated in this document, it describes the procedure for identifying the end effector. In addition, this document describes an assessment of which end effector is attached to a surgical instrument — a “smart” end effector or a “dumb” end effector. In various cases, the smart end effector may be the end effector that can transfer parameters and / or at least part of the operating program to a surgical instrument as part of the identification process. A “smart” end effector can be an end effector that in some way identifies how the end effector is used with a surgical instrument. In some cases, the “dumb” end effector is the end effector, which in no way identifies how the end effector is used by a surgical instrument. An example of a working procedure in accordance with the above is shown in FIG. 178.

As described herein, a battery may be used to power a surgical instrument. In various cases, a surgical instrument and / or a battery may be configured to evaluate the ability of a battery to provide a surgical instrument with sufficient power to perform one or more functions. In some cases, the surgical instrument and / or the battery may be configured to indicate to the user of the surgical instrument that the battery has sufficient power to perform one or more functions. In FIG. 179 is a circuit configured to indicate battery voltage. Such a circuit may be present in a surgical instrument and / or battery. In any case, the circuit may include a variety of indicators that may indicate the level of charge, voltage and / or power provided by the battery. For example, the circuit may include three indicators, including a first indicator, configured to indicate that the battery has at least the first voltage, a second indicator, configured to indicate that the battery has at least a second voltage, and a third indicator, configured to indicate that the battery has at least a third voltage. As shown in FIG. 179, circuit 12100 may include a first indicator circuit 12110, a second indicator circuit 12120, and a third indicator circuit 12130, which are arranged parallel to each other. When the 12101 switch is closed, the potential of the battery can be applied to the circuits 12110, 12120 and 12130 indicators. The first circuit 12110 of the indicator may include a Zener diode 12111, a LED 12112 and a resistor R1 12113. Similarly, the second circuit 12120 of the indicator may include a Zener diode 12121, an LED 12122 and a resistor R2 12123, and the third circuit 12130 of the indicator may include a Zener diode 12131, LED 12132 and resistor R3 12133. Each of the Zener diodes 12111, 12121 and 12131 may have a different breaking voltage. For example, the first Zener diode 12111 may have a breaking voltage of 11.5 V, for example, the second Zener diode 12121 may have a breaking voltage of 10 V, and, for example, the third Zener diode 12131 may have a breaking voltage of 8 V. In this embodiment, at battery voltage 11.5 V or more, LEDs 12112, 12122 and 12132 light up. Turning on all the LEDs can indicate to the user of the surgical instrument that the battery is fully charged and / or at least has enough charge to perform any function, buoy surgical instrument. When the battery voltage is 10 V or more, but less than 11.5 V, the LEDs 12112 and 12122 light up, but the 12132 LED does not light up. Turning on the LEDs 12112 and 12122, but not the LED 12132, may indicate to the user of the surgical instrument that the battery is not charged completely, but at least has enough charge to perform any function required by a surgical instrument. When the battery voltage is 8 V or more, but less than 10 V, LED 12112 lights up, but LEDs 12122 and 12132 do not light up. Turning on LED 12112, but not LEDs 12122 and 12132, can indicate to the user of the surgical instrument that a battery may or may not have sufficient charge to perform certain functions required by a surgical instrument. Thus, the LED screen may indicate a possible battery replacement. When the battery voltage is less than 8 V, none of the LEDs 12112, 12122, and 12132 light up. Thus, the LED screen may indicate that the battery cannot be used to reliably perform any function of the surgical instrument. Although the 12100 circuit contains three 12110, 12120, and 12130 indicator circuits, the circuit may include more than three indicator circuits that have Zener diodes with different discontinuous voltages. Such an embodiment can provide, for example, a clear differential indication of battery voltage. There are other options for implementation, which use only two chains of indicators.

In various cases, the battery may include a circuit configured to indicate that the battery is charged and / or has a charge sufficient to use it with a surgical instrument. In various cases, the surgical instrument may include a circuit configured to indicate that the battery connected to it is charged and / or has a charge sufficient to use it with the surgical instrument. In any case, as shown in FIG. 180, circuit 12200 may include a microprocessor 12201, which includes one or more keys in conjunction with a battery, such as a battery 9 V. Chain 12200 may additionally contain a capacitor 12202, such as a microfarad capacitor 10, which can receive energy from a circuit including diode 12203 and resistor 12204. Circuit 12200 may additionally contain 12205 LED and resistor 12206 on the discharge path of capacitor 12202. Such a circuit can provide a blinking 12205 LED until the battery can supply up to the voltage on the circuit is 12200. In such cases, the user can identify the flashing LED 12205 and realize that the battery has at least some energy, if not enough energy, to use with a surgical instrument. If the user does not identify the blinking of the 12205 LED, the user may assume that the battery power is not enough to use it.

In various circumstances, as described herein and shown in FIG. 284, a battery and / or a surgical instrument adapted for use with a battery may include a diagnostic circuit configured to estimate the energy, voltage, and / or current provided by the battery. In FIG. 184 shows the diagnosis circuit 12300. Such a circuit can be configured to evaluate the battery before use with a surgical instrument, during use with a surgical instrument and / or after use with a surgical instrument. In various cases, the battery can be used more than once, and in various cases, the battery can be rechargeable or non-rechargeable. The number of battery uses and information obtained during the diagnostic evaluation of a battery can be stored in a memory chip in a battery and / or a surgical instrument. In FIG. 183, an information table 12400 is presented containing information of a type that can be registered in a memory chip. For example, the number of uses may be recorded. For each application, for example, the maximum voltage and / or maximum current is recorded, according to which the battery is charged and / or recharged. For each application, the maximum permissible current, the applied current in mA, the applied current in Ah and / or the minimum voltage applied during the application can be recorded. For each use, for example, the charge time of the battery, the use time of the battery, the temperature of the battery during charging and / or the temperature of the battery during use can be recorded. These are just some examples of information that can be stored in memory. In various cases, such information may be used by a surgical instrument and / or a technician, for example, to evaluate a previous battery performance and / or battery suitability for further use.

In various cases, as shown in FIG. 182, the battery and / or surgical instrument used with the battery may include a circuit for disconnecting the battery when the battery charge level drops below the minimum charge level. In some cases, a lithium ion cell battery may overheat when used while its charge level is below the minimum charge level, and a shutdown circuit that prevents the battery from being used when the charge level is below the minimum charge level may prevent overheating.

In various cases, as shown in FIG. 181, the surgical instrument may include a controller configured to perform diagnostic testing of the instrument and / or the battery mounted thereon. For example, the controller may include a clock and a memory chip, configured to estimate and record the time of use of the tool and / or battery. In some cases, the controller may be configured to turn off the tool and / or the battery, if a long time has passed since the last use of the tool and / or battery. In some cases, the tool and / or battery may include one or more sensors that can be configured to evaluate various parameters of the tool and / or battery, such as temperature, humidity, and / or time during which the tool and / or the battery has been exposed to temperature and / or humidity. The controller can be configured to assess the correct operation of the sensors, and in case of incorrect operation, the controller can turn off the tool and / or battery. The controller may also be configured to estimate the number of periods of use of the tool and / or battery, and if the number of periods of use exceeds a certain amount, the controller may turn off the tool and / or battery. The controller can also be configured to estimate the energy that the battery can provide, as indicated in this document, and with a lack of energy the controller can turn off the tool and / or battery.

As described herein, a surgical instrument may include various sensors for collecting feedback data and / or other information about the condition of the instrument. In addition, a surgical instrument may include sensory indicators for transmitting feedback and / or information on the status of the instrument to the user. In some cases, the endoscope can be used with a surgical instrument to transmit additional feedback and / or information about the state of the instrument to the user. As described herein, the endoscope and the surgical instrument may exchange signals with a screen that can display, for example, feedback data from the endoscope and / or from the sensors of the surgical instrument. As shown in FIG. 75-93, the endoscope 5018 (FIG. 93) can exchange signals with a screen 5002 (FIG. 75). In some embodiments, the screen 5002 may include, for example, a screen projection device (HUD) and / or a video monitor. In addition, the screen 5002 may be, for example, a plasma screen, an LCD screen, or an electroluminescent screen. In various embodiments, the implementation of the screen 5002 may broadcast the first information layer 5010, which may include, for example, feedback in the form of a video image. Feedback in the form of a video image may be feedback in the form of images viewed using an endoscope 5018 (FIG. 93), for example, on a surgical field, and may display, for example, at least a portion of a surgical instrument 5020 viewed through an endoscope 5018.

In various embodiments, the screen 5002 may include a touch screen 5004. As shown in FIG. 75, the user can interact with the touchscreen 5004 to work with the screen 5002 and / or surgical instrument 5020. For example, the touchscreen 5004 can communicate with the screen 5002, and input devices used with the touchscreen 5004 allow you to adjust and / or change information displayed on the screen 5002. In such embodiments, the user can operate the screen 5002 without using additional input devices, such as a keyboard and / or computer mouse, for example. In other words, to regulate and / or change the information displayed on the screen 5002, additional tools and / or input parts may not be required. In addition, in various embodiments, the implementation of the touch screen 5004 is easy to clean and / or sterilize. For example, the touch screen 5004 may include a flat surface that can be easily wiped clean in the surgical field and / or the operating room. In addition, or alternatively, the touch screen 5004 can directly and / or indirectly exchange signals with the surgical instrument 5020 so that when data is entered on the touchscreen 5004, the data is transmitted to the surgical instrument 5020. The user can be, for example, a surgeon, an operator and / assistant.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the touch screen 5004 may be located on top of at least a portion of the screen 5002 and may be, for example, removably attached to the screen 5002. For example, the touch screen 5004 may be compatible with multiple screens and can be attached with the possibility of release and disconnected from at least one screen. In addition, in some embodiments, the implementation of the touch screen 5004 may be an independent screen that can operate independently of the screen 5002. For example, the detachable LCD screen may contain a touch screen 5004, and the detachable LCD screen may overlap at least a portion of the screen 5002. In other embodiments, the touchscreen 5004 may be embedded in the screen 5002. In the touchscreen 5004, for example, resistive technology, capacitive technology, ultrasound beam technology and / or close technology may be used. Monoparental visualization.

As shown mainly in FIG. 93, in various embodiments, the feedback controller 5016 may exchange signals with the surgical instrument 5020, the endoscope 5018 and / or the screen 5002. In some embodiments, the wired and / or wireless connection 5017 between the feedback controller 5016 and the endoscope 5018 communications in the form of a video from the endoscope 5018 to the feedback controller 5016. In addition, a wired and / or wireless connection 5019 between the feedback controller 5016 and the surgical instrument 5020 and / or the microcontroller of the surgical instrument 5020 can be used to transmit feedback data measured and / or detected by the surgical device 5020 to the feedback controller 5016. For example, various sensors are described in this document, as well as in Zemlock 263 and Zemlock ‘344, the description of which is fully incorporated in this document, and various sensors can detect feedback and / or information on the state of the tool. In addition, a wired and / or wireless connection 5015 between the feedback controller 5016 and the screen 5002 can serve to transmit feedback data from the surgical instrument 5020 and / or feedback in the form of a video image from the endoscope 5018 to the screen 5002. At least in one embodiment, the feedback in the form of a video image can be displayed in the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002, and the feedback data can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 on the screen 5004. In embodiments in which the connectable LCD screen containing the touch screen 5004 is located on top of the screen 5002, a wired and / or wireless connection between the feedback controller 5016 and the detachable LCD screen can serve, for example, to transmit feedback data to the detachable LCD screen and / or LCD screen to the controller 5010 feedback.

As shown mainly in FIG. 76, the screen 5002 may transmit the first information layer 5010, which may contain, for example, feedback in the form of a video image from the endoscope 5018 (FIG. 93). In various cases, the feedback 5010 in the form of a video image may include an image of a surgical instrument 5020 acting on the tissue T. In various embodiments, the surgical instrument 5020 may be similar, for example, to a surgical instrument 10 (FIG. 1) and a disposable loading unit ( OZB) and / or end effector 5022 associated with a surgical instrument may be similar, for example, to the loading unit 20 (FIG. 2). The SZB 5022 of the surgical instrument 5020 may pivotally rotate relative to the fabric T, grip and / or clamp the fabric T between a pair of branches, sew the fabric T with brackets and / or cut the fabric T with a cutting element as described herein. In addition, the endoscope 5018, which can be located on the surgical field and / or next to it, can view the OZB 5022 and can transmit the video signal and / or recording to the feedback controller 5016 (FIG. 93). In various embodiments, the implementation of the feedback in the form of a video image in the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002 may be a visual feedback allowing the user of the surgical instrument 5020 to see the surgical field in real time.

As shown mainly in FIG. 77, the second information layer 5012 can be displayed on the screen 5002. In addition, the user can select, move, resize, reduce, stretch, change and / or perform other actions regarding the second information layer 5012. For example, the user can work with the second information layer 5012 by interacting with the touch screen 5004. As described herein, the second information layer 5012 may include feedback data from the surgical instrument 5020 and / or monitor the management of the surgeon with the tool 5020. In various embodiments, the second information layer 5012 may include a control panel 5030, and a touch screen 5004 may be used to select and / or use elements of the control panel 5030. The control panel 5030 can be minimized, resized, moved and / or otherwise acted upon via the touchscreen 5004. For example, the user can reduce or minimize the control panel 5030 by selecting the reduce / increase icon 5032 and can enlarge or expand the control panel 5030 by re-select icon 5032 decrease / increase. In addition, the user can move the control panel 5030 on the screen 5002, for example, by dragging the control panel 5030 on the screen 5002. In addition, the user can resize the control panel 5030 on the screen 5002 by compressing and / or stretching multiple contact points on the touch screen 5004 The person skilled in the art will recognize that various traditional and / or intuitive contact elements for interacting with the touchscreen 5004 can be used to modify and / or control, for example, the second information insulating layer 5012 and / or 5030 control panel.

As shown in FIG. 77, the control panel 5030 may include a variety of menus, categories, and / or classifications. For example, the control panel 5030 may include a tool feedback menu 5036, a screen menu 5060, and / or a tool controller menu 5070. The user can use the control panel 5030 to select a menu and / or to switch between operating states of the touchscreen 5004. For example, the touchscreen 5004 can transmit commands and / or control signals to the controller 5016 (FIG. 93) and / or the instrument microcontroller when the user selects 5070 instrument controller on 5030 control panel. In such embodiments, as described herein, the touchscreen 5004 may operate in a tool control state. In addition, the settings associated with the second information layer 5012 and / or screen 5002, for example, can be changed by the user when selecting the screen menu 5060 on the control panel 5030. In such scenarios, the implementation of the touch screen 5004 may function in a state of change settings. In addition, or alternatively, the feedback data contained in the second information layer 5012 can be changed by the user when selecting the tool feedback menu 5036. In such embodiments, the touchscreen 5004 may function in a feedback control state. In various embodiments, the control panel 5030 may include additional and / or smaller menus, categories, and / or classifications. In addition, various menus, categories, and / or classifications of the control panel 5030 can be changed, for example, according to user preferences. Menus, categories and / or classifications may be verbal and / or symbolic in the second information layer 5012. In various embodiments, the categories in each menu 5036, 5060, 5070 can be selectively displayed in the second information layer 5012. For example, the categories in each menu 5036 , 5060, 5070 can be displayed only in the second information layer 5012 when the user selects the appropriate menu 5036, 5060, 5070 located above. In other embodiments, the user can, for example, manually bring to a minimum and / or bring and up to maximum categories and / or subcategories corresponding to each menu 5036, 5060 and / or 5070.

As shown in FIG. 77, the instrument feedback menu 5036 may include multiple feedback categories and may communicate with the feedback data measured and / or detected by the surgical instrument 5020 (FIG. 93) during a surgical procedure. As described herein, a surgical instrument 5020 can detect and / or measure the position of a jaw adapted to move, between an open position and a closed position, the thickness of the clamped tissue, the clamping force acting on the clamped tissue, the hinge rotation of OZB 5022 and / for example, the position, speed and / or force of the trigger element. In addition, the feedback controller 5016 (FIG. 93), exchanging signals with the surgical instrument 5020, can be used to transmit the received feedback to the screen 5002, which can display feedback in the second information layer 5012. As described in this document, the selection, the placement and / or generation of feedback data displayed in the second information layer 5012 can be changed, for example, based on user input on the touchscreen 5004.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the menu 5060 screen panel 5030 control can communicate with many categories, such as, for example, the system 5062 units and / or modes 5064 data. In some embodiments, the user may select a category 5062 system of units to switch between systems of units, for example, between metric units and a system of units of weights and weights based on an imperial system. In addition, the user can select a category of 5064 data modes to switch between types of numeric representations (FIG. 79-81) of feedback data and / or, for example, between types of graphical representations (FIG. 82-83) of feedback data. Numerical representations of feedback data may be displayed, for example, as numerical values and / or as a percentage. In addition, graphical representations of feedback data may be displayed, for example, as a function of time (FIG. 82) and / or distance (FIG. 83). As described herein, the user can select the instrument controller menu 5070 on the control panel 5030 to enter commands for the surgical instrument 5020 (FIG. 93), which can be implemented, for example, by instrument controller 5016 (FIG. 93) and / or the microcontroller .

As shown in FIG. 78, the second information layer 5012 may overlap at least a portion of the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002. In addition, the touch screen 5004 allows the user to control the second information layer 5012 regarding feedback in the form of a video image in the lower first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002. For example, the user can use the touchscreen 5004 to select, control, change the format, resize, and / or otherwise change the information displayed in the second information layer 5012. In the In some embodiments, the user may use the touch screen 5004 to control the second information layer 5012 with respect to the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002. The user may, for example, select the menu, category and / or classification of the control panel 5030, and the second information layer 5012 and / or control panel 5030 are adapted to fit the user's choice. In various embodiments, the user may select a category from the instrument feedback category 5036 that corresponds to a specific element or elements of the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010. The feedback corresponding to the category selected by the user may be moved, positioned and / or “attached” to the position on screen 5002 relative to a particular element or elements of a surgical instrument 5020. For example, the selected feedback can be moved to Assumption near and / or in position to be overlapped on a particular element or elements of the surgical instrument 5020 that are displayed in the first information layer 5010.

As shown in FIG. 79 and 80, when the user chooses, for example, the category 5040 of scalpel advancement from the tool feedback menu 5036, the obtained data and / or information relating to the scalpel advancement can be moved and / or “linked” to the position in the second information layer 5012 relative to the OZB scalpel 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010. Additionally, the control panel 5030 can be minimized and / or reduced after the user has selected the desired category or categories from the instrument feedback menu 5036. Feedback data 5052 relating to the advancement of the scalpel can be displayed on the screen 5002 next to the detected scalar OZB 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010, and can move, for example, between the first position (FIG. 79) when the scalpel is closer to the beginning starting position, and the second position (FIG. 80), when the scalpel is closer to the distal end of the starting stroke, when moving and / or moving a scalpel through OZB 5022. For example, when moving a scalpel progressively at a distance X mm d nnye 5052 relating to the promotion of a scalpel, can be placed in a first position (FIG. 79) and in translation by a distance Y scalpel mm data 5052 relating to the promotion of a scalpel, can be placed in the second position (FIG. 80). In such scenarios, the operator can track the progress of the scalpel during the launch, reading the feedback data 5052 on the screen 5002. For example, the branches of the 5024 end effector and / or the T tissue block the view of the OZB 5022 scalpel, for example, the operator can track and / or approximately to determine the position of the scalpel in OZB 5020 based on the change in the value of feedback data 5052 and / or the offset of the position of feedback data 5052 relative to OZB 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010 located below. ohm, the screen 5002 may include a numeric representation of the promotion of a scalpel, and pictographic and / or symbolic representation of the promotion of a scalpel. For example, a symbol 5054, such as an arrow, may be moved and / or passed relative to the OZB 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010 below, to show the progress of the scalpel through the OZB 5022. For example, as shown in FIG. 79 and 80, the symbol 5054 may extend distally when the scalpel extends distally, for example, from a position near the start of the starting stroke (FIG. 79) to a position near the distal end of the starting stroke (FIG. 80).

 In various embodiments, the user may select one or more different categories of feedback data from the instrument feedback menu 5036, and different categories of feedback data may be displayed in the second information layer 5012 on the screen 5002. In such embodiments, when the user’s choice of a different category of feedback data from the tool feedback menu 5036, the numeric and / or symbolic representation of the feedback data can be moved to position on screen 5002 relative to OZB 5022, displayed in the first information layer 5010 below. For example, when the user selects the category 5038 of the branch position from the tool’s feedback menu 5036, the feedback data related to the position of the branch configured to move between the open position and clamped position, can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and, for example, can be moved to a position near the completed (s) with the ability to move the branch (s) 5024 surgical tool 5020 on screen 5002. In addition, when selecting the scalpel speed category 5042, feedback data 5058 (FIG. 82) related to the speed of the scalpel can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and can be moved to the position near the scalpel in OZB 5022 on the screen 5002 similarly to the numerical data 5052 and / or the symbol 5054 described above. When a user chooses a fabric thickness category 5044, feedback data related to the detected fabric thickness can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and, for example, can be moved to a position next to the measured fabric T on the screen 5002. In addition, at least one In an embodiment, the second information layer 5012 may include a scale and / or a ruler, which may indicate the detected tissue thickness. The user can move the ruler via the touchscreen 5004 relative to the underlying fabric T displayed in the first information layer 5010, which can help the user, for example, to assess changes in the thickness of the fabric. When the user selects the category 5046 of the articulated rotation of the end effector feedback data 5252 (FIG. 84-88) related to the articulated rotation of the OZB 5022 can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and can be moved, for example, to the position near the articulation 5026 (FIG . 84 and 85) OZB 5022 on the screen 5002. When the user selects the category 5048 of the starting force, feedback data related to the starting force exerted by the scalpel on the tissue can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and can be located, for example measures near scalpel EHS 5022 on the screen 5002. In addition, feedback information relating to the trigger force applied scalpel, can be moved in the second information layer 5012 while moving relatively scalpel EHS 5022, such as during start-up speed. In addition, when selecting the category 5050 clamping force, the feedback data 5158 (FIG. 83) related to the clamping force acting on the fabric T can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and can move near the OZB 5022 displayed in the first information below layer 5010. In such embodiments, feedback data 5158 relating to the clamping force may vary in part of the clamping pressure along the length and / or width of the DSP 5022, for example, during the clamping and / or during the starting stroke.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the feedback displayed in the second information layer 5012 can move along with the corresponding element of the surgical instrument 5020 in the first information layer 5010. For example, when moving OZB 5022 through the surgical field, OZB 5022 can move around the screen 5002. In such embodiments feedback related to OZB 5022, such as, for example, the position of the branch and / or articulated turn data, can be moved along with OZB 5022. Moving the corresponding feedback This ensures that the feedback remains in the operator’s field of view, while the operator does not need to look away from the corresponding element of the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002. In addition, the movement of the corresponding feedback contributes to the fact that the feedback does not block element (s) of the surgical instrument 5020, displayed (s) in the first information layer 5010, which (s) the operator desires to see on the screen 5002.

In some embodiments, the user may select multiple feedback categories to view on the screen 5002 at the same time. In addition, the selected feedback, or feedback types, is configured to automatically be placed on the screen 5002 to display relevant data without overlays in the second information layer 5012. In other words, the feedback displayed in the second information layer 5012 may not overlap with another feedback displayed in the second information layer 5012; however, such feedback can be superimposed, for example, on the feedback in the form of a video image of the first information layer 5010 displayed on the screen 5002. In various embodiments, when moving and / or “linking” feedback data to the position on the screen relative to the surgical tool 5020 in the first information layer 5010 below, the user can adjust the default position by dragging the feedback data to any other place in the second information layer 5012 f.

As shown in FIG 81, a symbolic representation 5056 of a scalpel advance, such as, for example, a cross, target, and / or pictographic representation of a scalpel and / or scalpel blade, can be moved to a position in the second information layer 5012, which is superimposed on the scalpel position displayed in the first information layer 5010. In some embodiments, even if the scalpel is not visible on the screen 5002, for example, if the scalpel is hidden, the symbol 5056 of the scalpel can move and / or follow in the detected The position of the scalpel in OZB 5022 on screen 5002. For example, the symbolic representation 5056 may be in the first position relative to OZB 5022 near the start of the starting stroke, and the symbolic representation 5056 moves to the second position relative to OZB 5022 near the end of the starting stroke.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the feedback selected by the user through the touch screen 5004 may be “tied” to the corner, edge, and / or other specified points on the screen 5002. For example, as shown in FIG. 81, the numerical data 5052 relating to the advancement of the scalpel can be moved to the corner of the screen 5002. In addition, or alternatively, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to move the numeric data 5052 to another position on the touch screen 5004. located below in the first information layer 5010, the user can move numeric data 5052 to a position in the second information layer 5012 so that numeric data 5052 does not block and / or do not overlap the corresponding and / or a specific element of the PSA 5022. In addition, or alternatively, the user can move the numeric data 5052 to a position next to the corresponding PSU 5022 so that the user can easily view the corresponding PSU 5022 and the numeric data 5052 simultaneously.

As shown in FIG. 84 and 85, a symbolic representation 5254 (FIG. 85) of feedback data received from the feedback controller 5016 (FIG 93), may be included in the second information layer 5012. For example, the symbolic representation 5254 of the hinge rotation of OZB 5022, for example, as a contracted angle and / or arc, can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 and can move to the position on the screen 5002 side by side and / or over the articulated joint 5026 of the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010. For example, a constricted arc can There is no passage between axis A formed by OZB 5022 without a hinge (FIG. 84) and axis A ’formed by OZB 5022 with a hinge (FIG. 85). In some embodiments, the implementation, even if the articulation 5026 is not displayed on the screen, a symbolic representation 5254 of the angle of articulation can be displayed in the second information layer 5012. For example, if the articulation 5026 is not installed within the field of view of the endoscope and / or limited or blocked, the symbolic the hinge angle representation 5254 may provide a visual indication of the hinge rotation for a user. In various embodiments, the symbolic representation 5252 can be adjusted and / or changed while moving and / or pivoting the OZB 5022. For example, the symbolic representation 5254 can have the form of an arc or line arrow that can extend from its original position and / or position of the OZB 5022 without pivotal rotation (FIG. 84) to the position of OZB 5022 with a pivotal rotation (FIG. 85), as detected by the tool 5020. In addition, in various embodiments, the symbolic representation 5254 can “snap” to iju relatively EHS 5022 displayed in the first information layer so that a symbolic representation 5254 is superimposed and / or combined with EHS 5022. For example, as shown mainly in FIG. 85, the symbolic representation 5254 of the hinge angle can move to and / or to a position near the hinge joint 5026 displayed in the first information layer 5010 on the screen 5002, and can stretch between the axis A formed by the HAR 5022 in its original position and / or position without hinge rotation, and the axis A ', formed by OZB 5022 at the hinge rotation OZB 5022.

In addition, in various embodiments, the implementation of numerical data 5252 related to the hinge rotation of the OZB 5022, can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 on the screen 5002. In addition, the data 5252 may change when the hinge rotation of the OZB 5022. For example, the second information layer 5012 may display the hinge rotation X ° to the hinge rotation OZB 5022 (FIG. 84) and may display the hinge rotation Y ° after the hinge rotation OZB 5022 (FIG. 85). In various embodiments, the feedback data 5252 regarding the hinge rotation of the AOZ 5022 may be displayed in the second information layer 5012, for example, on and / or near the articulation 5026 of the surgical instrument 5020 displayed in the first information layer 5010. The user can use the touch screen 5004 for moving, resizing, reducing and / or performing other actions with the data of the 5252 hinge rotation displayed in the second information layer 5012, for example, with respect to the feedback in the photo of the video image displayed in the first information layer 5010. In addition, or alternatively, the user can interact with the touchscreen 5004 to move the symbolic representation 5254 and / or numeric data 5252 to a different position on the touchscreen 5004. Based on the position of the surgical instrument 5020 located lower in the first information layer 5010, the user can move numeric data 5252 to a position in the second information layer 5012 so that numeric data 5252 does not block and / or do not overlap the definition unified (s) element (s) of OZB 5022. In addition, or alternatively, the user can move the numeric data 5252 to a position next to the corresponding (s) element (s) of OZB 5022 so that the user can easily view the corresponding ( -shorts) element (s) of OZB 5022 and numerical data 5252 simultaneously.

As shown in FIG. 82, the graphical representation can be selected from the screen menu 5060 of the control panel 5030, for example, using the touchscreen 5004. In such embodiments, the graphical feedback 5058 can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 on the screen 5002. The user can select a graphical representation to view the measured and / or obtained data of a surgical instrument 5020 and / or its controller with respect to time and / or spatial position. For example, the user wants to monitor the speed of the triggering element throughout the entire starting stroke, and to do this, he can select the scalpel speed category 5042 (FIG 78) from the instrument feedback menu 5036 (FIG 78). In such scenarios, the implementation of the graphical representation 5058 of the speed of the scalpel may, for example, continue to receive reference points and grow during the starting stroke. In various embodiments, after completion of the start-up stroke, the graphical representation 5058 may display a soft start period 5057 and / or a smooth scalpel stop 5059. In addition, the graphic representation 5058 can be installed on the screen 5002 so that the speed of the scalpel at a particular location along the branch 5024 of the end effector corresponds to a specific location along the branch 5052 of the end effector, which is displayed in the first information layer 5010. For example, the graphic representation 5058 can start at the beginning and / or in close proximity to the beginning of the path of the scalpel through OZB 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010, and may end at the end and / or directly Close to the end of the scalpel path through OZB 5022 displayed in the first information layer 5010. In addition, as described in this document, the graphic representation 5058 can “snap” to the corresponding position on the screen, and the user can use the touch screen 5004, for example, Moving and / or resizing the graphic representation 5058 as desired In some embodiments, the implementation of a numerical representation of the starting speed can be displayed in the second information layer 5012 along with a graphic representation 5058.

As shown in FIG. 83, in various embodiments, the user may need to monitor the clamping force acting on the fabric T along the length and / or width of the branch 5024 branch effector, and for this he can select the clamping force category 5050 (FIG. 78) from the reverse menu 5036 communication tool (FIG. 78). In such embodiments, the graphical representation 5158 of the clamping force may be displayed in the second information layer 5012. In some embodiments, the graphic representation 5158 may be located in the second information layer 5012 relative to the clamped fabric displayed in the first information layer 5010. For example, the graphical representation 5158 may begin at the beginning and / or in close proximity to the beginning of the proximal end of the branch 5024, displayed in the first information layer 5010, and may end at the end and / or in close proximity to the end of the distal end of the branch 5024 displayed in the first information layer 5010. In addition, as described herein, the graphical representation 5158 can “snap” to the corresponding position on the screen, and the user can use the touch screen 5004, for example, to move and / or resize the graphic representation 5158. In some embodiments, the implementation of the graphic representation may change during use, for example, to display changes in clamping force and during the start-up progress.

As shown in FIG. 86-88, in various embodiments, the user may interact with the touch screen 5004 to enter control commands and / or instructions for the surgical instrument 5020 via the instrument controller 5016 and / or the microcontroller. For example, the user can enter control commands regarding the hinge rotation of OZB 5022, clamping the branches of the end effector 5024, pulling out and / or retracting the cutting element and / or pushing brackets out of OZB 5022. In various embodiments, the user can select the tool controller category 5070 from the control panel 5030 through the touch screen 5004 to activate the tool control state so that the user can control the surgical instrument 5020 through the touch screen 5004. When the sensor is activated The user may interact with the touch screen 5004 to control the surgical instrument 5020. For example, the user may interact with control buttons and / or icons in the second information layer 5012 and / or may interact with dots on the touch screen 5004 located below surgical instrument 5020, for entering commands for surgical instrument 5020.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86, the user can interact with the touchscreen 5004, for example, to indicate the desired direction and angle of the hinge rotation of the SSS 5022. In some embodiments, the user can drag the contact point along the touchscreen 5004 from the SSP 5022 and / or a nearby point to the place of the desired hinge end effector 5002. As shown in FIG. 86, the user can draw a line or arc 5352 from OZB 5022 and / or a nearby point depicted in the first information layer 5010 to the place of the desired articulated rotation of OZB 5022. For example, the arc 5352 can extend from and / or approximately from the axis A formed by the OZB 5022, and the arc 5352 can extend to the axis A ', formed by OZB 5022 in the desired position of the hinge rotation. In addition, the arc 5352 may extend, for example, in the direction indicated by the arrow 5354. In some embodiments, the arc 5352 may not be displayed in the second information layer 5010 when the user enters the desired hinge rotation via the touchscreen 5004. In various embodiments, the touchscreen 5004 can transmit the desired pivot angle to the instrument controller 5016 (FIG. 93) and / or the microcontroller, which can pivot OZB 5022 at the desired pivot angle. As shown in FIG. 88, an instrument controller 5016 (FIG. 93) and / or a microcontroller can pivot the OZB 5022 to the A ’axis, for example, based on user input via the touchscreen 5004.

As shown mainly in FIG. 87, in various embodiments, the user may act on control buttons, charts and / or icons in the first information layer 5012 to transmit commands to the surgical tool 5020. For example, the first information layer 5012 may include a symbol or icon 5356, and the user can move and / or control the icon 5356 to pivot the OZB 5022. In various embodiments, the icon 5356 may include, for example, the scheme OZB 5022. In addition, the user can drag the icon 5356 to arnirnogo rotation and / or rotated position for pivoting the EHS 5022. In various embodiments, the line and / or arc 5358 can include the direction and / or the degree of pivoting required for the user. For example, the arc 5358 may extend from the position of the 5356 without a hinge to the position of the 5356 ’with a hinge. The 5356 ’swivel icon may correspond, for example, to the desired hinge rotation of the OZB 5022. As shown in FIG. 88, a tool controller 5016 and / or a microcontroller can pivot OZB 5022 to axis A ', for example, based on user input via a touchscreen 5004. For example, OZB 5022 can be pivoted at a retractable angle formed by an arc 5358 between a 5356 icon without a hinge swivel and hinge 5356 ', as shown in FIG. 87

As shown mainly in FIG. 89 and 90, in various embodiments, the user can interact with the touchscreen 5004 to transmit commands to the surgical instrument 5020 associated with closing the branches 5024. In some embodiments, the user can drag the contact point across the touchscreen 5004 from the moveable branch 5024 and / or a nearby point to the closed position configured to move the branch 5024 to initiate the closing of the branch 5024. For example, the user can draw a line or arc 5362 (FIG. 89) from the movable jaw 5024 and / or a nearby point displayed in the first information layer 5010 to the desired closing position configured to move the junction 5024. In various embodiments, the touchscreen 5004 can transmit a closing motion to the controller 5016 tool and / or microcontroller, which can perform the closure of the completed (movable) branch (branch) 5024. In some embodiments, the arc 5362 drawn by the user on the canopy Orn screen 5004, may extend from and / or about the axis A, formed by the moveable jaws 5024 and 5362 arc may extend to the axis A '(FIG. 90) formed configured to move the branches 5024 in the desired clamped position. In addition, the arc 5362 may extend, for example, in the direction indicated by the arrow 5364. As shown in FIG. 90, the instrument controller 5016 and / or the microcontroller may influence the closing of the jaw 5024 relative to the A ’axis, for example, based on user input via the touch screen 5004.

As shown in FIG. 91 and 92, in various embodiments, the user may act on the control buttons and / or icons in the first information layer 5012 to transmit commands to the surgical instrument 5020. For example, the first information layer 5012 may include a control interface 5072, which may include buttons 5074, 5075, 5076, 5077, 5078 for the introduction of commands for the controller 5016 tool and / or microcontroller. Buttons for transmitting commands to the controller 5016 of the tool (FIG. 93) and / or the microcontroller may relate to, for example, the hinge rotation of OZB 5022, closing and / or compression of the branch 5024, pushing and / or pulling the cutting element and / or pushing the brackets out of OZB 5022 The user can interact with the touchscreen 5004 to select a button or buttons via the control interface 5072. As shown mainly in FIG. 91, the control interface 5072 may include a stop / pull button 5474, a temporary stop button 5475, a start button 5476, an acceleration button 5477, and / or a deceleration button 5478. The user may, for example, act on the start button 5476 to initiate the start-up stroke and / or push the trigger element, on the temporary stop button 5475 to pause the start-up stroke, and / or on the stop / retract button 5474 to stop the start-up stroke and retract the start-up element. In addition, the user can interact with the control interface 5072 to control the speed of the starting element throughout the start-up stroke. For example, the user may act on the acceleration button 5477 to increase the speed of the trigger element, and the user may act on the deceleration button 5478 to reduce the speed of the trigger element. The user may, for example, increase the speed of the starting element after and / or during the soft start phase, and may, for example, reduce the speed of the starting element in the soft start stop phase by the end of the starting stroke. In other embodiments, the control interface 5072 may include buttons and / or controls, for example, to change the branch closure 5024 and / or the hinge rotation of the DSS 5022. In various embodiments, the control interface 5072 may be "tied" to a position in the second information layer 5012 when you select the menu of the instrument controller 5070 on the control panel 5030 and / or when you select the control state of the tool that is otherwise carried out by the user. The user may, for example, move, adjust and / or control the control interface 5072 relative to the first information layer 5010 and / or the screen 5002.

In various embodiments, the implementation, as shown in FIG. 92, the second information layer 5012 may include a advancement ruler 5480, which may, for example, indicate the position of the trigger element in OZB 5022. The advancement ruler 5480 may extend between the proximal end 5482 and the distal end 5488 and may form the most proximal position and the most distal position triggering element during start-up. In various embodiments, for example, an indication of the position of the trigger element along the advancement ruler 5480 may be provided. In some embodiments, the user may use the controls on the control interface 5072 to control the trigger. For example, the user may interact with the control interface 5072 to start and / or stop the soft start phases and / or the smooth starting stop based on the specified position of the starting element along the advance line 5480. In addition, the advancement ruler 5480 may include a measuring scale and / or guides 5484, 5486, which may be set to positions along the advancement ruler 5480, where, for example, the soft start and / or smooth stop phases may begin and / or end. Guides 5484, 5486 can serve the user, for example, as a visual indicator of the start and / or end of the soft start period using the acceleration button 5077 and / or the soft stop phase using the slow button 5078 during the starting stroke. In various embodiments, the implementation of the position of the guides 5484, 5486 may be preset by the user.

As shown in FIG. 92, in various embodiments, the tool controller 5016 and / or the microcontroller can automatically influence the speed variations of the trigger element based on the position of the guides 5484, 5486 along the advance ruler 5480. In addition, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to move and / or control the advance ruler 5480, and thus to change the phases of a soft start and / or a smooth start stop. For example, the soft start and / or soft stop phases can be set at predetermined positions along the advancement ruler 5480 between the proximal end 5482 and the distal end 5488. In some embodiments, the user can interact with the touch screen 5004 to move and / or adjust the position of the guides 5484, 5486 along the line 5480 promotion. For example, a user may translate guides 5484, 5486 between a plurality of positions on the advancement ruler 5480 by pulling and / or releasing the guides 5484, 5486 to lengthen and / or shorten the soft start phases and / or smoothly stop the starting stroke. In some embodiments, the user may interact with the touchscreen 5004 to move and / or adjust the position of the distal end 5488 of the advancement ruler 5480 to lengthen and / or reduce the starting stroke. For example, a user may drag the distal end 5488 proximally to reduce the starting stroke and / or, for example, drag the distal end 5488 distally to lengthen the starting stroke. In various embodiments, the instrument controller 5016 and / or the microcontroller can adjust the speed of the trigger element and / or the length of the trigger stroke, for example, by changing the positions of the guides 5484, 5486 and / or the distal end 5488 along the advancement ruler 5480.

In various embodiments, the implementation of the surgical instrument 10 may include at least one shutdown mechanism. As described in more detail in this document, such a shutdown mechanism may prevent unauthorized use of the surgical instrument by the end user. For example, in FIG. 134 shows a 2500 power supply. Power supply 2500 can be used to power a surgical instrument, such as, for example, surgical instrument 10 (see FIG. 1), and it is in many ways similar to other power sources, described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as, for example , the power supply 200 (see FIG. 1) and other power supplies of the type described in more detail in Zemlok '763 publication, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. To protect the power source 2500 from unauthorized use, the power source 2500 can be configured to become inoperative or inactive in the event of unauthorized use. For example, the power source 2500 may become inactive, for example, by stopping the reception, storage and / or transmission of energy. Protection against unauthorized use can ensure proper operation of the power supply 2500 during use with a surgical instrument 10.

As shown in FIG. 134 and 135, the power source 2500 may include an outer case 2502, which may cover various components of the power source 2500, such as, for example, a battery 2510. The case 2502 may include a first case 2504 and a second case 2506, which may be connected with the possibility of disconnection with the first shell 2504, as shown in FIG. 135. In some examples, shells 2504 and 2506 may be formed from a thermoplastic material, such as, for example, polycarbonate. Alternatively, other materials having appropriate characteristics may be used. In addition, shells 2504 and 2506 can be connected to each other through one or more attachment methods, such as, for example, gluing, welding, using fastening structures and / or screws. In one example, the shells 2504 and 2506 can be connected to each other by means of a hook-type engagement. In another example, shells 2504 and 2506 can be attached to each other by means of fasteners 2508, as shown in FIG. 135.

As shown in FIG. 135-137, the power supply 2500 may include a shutdown mechanism 2512, which may render the power supply 2500 inoperative if the power supply 2500 is disturbed. For example, the shutdown mechanism 2512 may render the power supply 2500 inoperative when unauthorized use of the housing 2502. As shown in FIG. 135-137, the shutdown mechanism 2512 may comprise a circuit 2514, which may include a rupture portion 2516 (see FIG. 136). In some examples, the rupture portion 2516 may be formed from a conductive material that can be easily broken. As shown in FIG. 136, circuit 2514 may be connected to battery 2510 and may allow current to flow as long as the rupture section 2516 remains intact. The rupture of the rupture portion 2516, as shown in FIG. 137, may interrupt circuit 2514, thus interrupting the current flowing through it. In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 135, the circuit 2514 may be located so that the rupture portion 2516 may break when the first shell 2504 and the second shell 2506 are separated from each other, which can lead to the inability of the power supply 2500 to receive, store and / or supply power to the surgical instrument 10 without application considerable effort to restore a broken chain 2514.

As shown in FIG. 135, a power supply 2500 may contain one or more battery cells depending on the current load requirements of the tool 10. In various aspects, the power supply 2500 may include a battery, such as, for example, a battery 2510, which may include a plurality battery cells that can be connected to each other in series. Power supply 2500 may be replaceable. In some aspects, the power source 2500 may comprise a rechargeable battery (e.g., lead based, nickel based, lithium ion, etc.). The battery cells may be, for example, 3-volt lithium battery cells, such as battery cells CR 123A, although in other embodiments other types of battery cells may be used (including battery cells with different voltage levels and / or different chemical reactions). The user can disconnect and remove the depleted power supply 2500 from the surgical instrument 10 and attach the charged power supply 2500 in its place. Subsequently, a depleted power supply 2500 can be charged and reused. It is also assumed that the power source 2500 may include at least one disposable battery. In various aspects, the voltage of a disposable battery can range from about 9 volts to about 30 volts. The user can disconnect and remove the exhausted one-time power supply 2500 and connect a new one-time power supply 2500 to power the surgical instrument 10.

As described above, the power supply 2500 may include rechargeable battery cells and may, for example, be removably disposed within the handle portion 14 of the housing 12 (see FIG. 1). In such circumstances, the power supply 2500 can be charged using a charger base, which may contain a power supply for charging the power supply 2500. A shutdown mechanism, such as, for example, the shutdown mechanism 2512, can be used to prevent recharging the power source 2500 through the base of the charger when unauthorized use of the power source 2500, as described above. For example, the circuit 2514 may be connected to the battery 2510 and may be configured to communicate with the base of the charger in order to allow the base of the charger to recharge the battery 2510. As described above, the rupture portion 2516 (see FIG. 135) may break when separating the first shell 2504 from the second shell 2506, thus interrupting the flow of current through the circuit 2514, which can prevent the battery 2510 from being charged from the base of the charger. This may be an advantage in preventing unauthorized use of the power source 2500 by the end user, since the unauthorized use of the power source 2500 may make it impossible to recharge it for later use with a surgical instrument 10.

As shown in FIG. 138-141, the power supply 2500 may include a data storage unit, such as, for example, a memory 2552, which may store data, including information about the power supply 2500, such as, for example, the available total charge, the number of applications and / or performance . In addition, the memory 2552 can store data about the surgical instrument 10, including various information regarding the operation of the surgical instrument 10 during the surgical procedure, such as, for example, the indications of various sensors, the number of starts, the number of cassettes used and / or information about the patients treated. Memory 2552 may include any means for storing software, including, without limitation, a ROM (read-only memory), a RAM (random access memory), an EPROM (programmable ROM), an EEPROM (electrically erasable EPROM) and / or other computer-readable media. .

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 138-141, the power source 2500 may include a data access portal, such as, for example, an input / output interface 2550, for providing access to data stored in memory 2552. For example, an input / output interface 2550 may allow data loading, stored in the memory of 2552 power sources 2500, to an external computer device for evaluation and analysis. In certain circumstances, an input / output interface 2550 may be a wired interface and may be functionally connected to a shutdown mechanism 2512, which may include a disconnected connection, which may serve to prevent data transmission through the input / output interface 2550. Similar to the breakable section 2516 of the shutdown mechanism 2512, the breakaway coupling of the shutdown mechanism 2554 can be positioned so that it can break when the jacket 2502 is broken, such as when the first shell 2504 and the second shell 2506 are separated from each other.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 139-141, the input-output interface 2550 may include a connector 2555, which may be configured to receive a corresponding connector 2556 from an external computing device, for example, to provide data transfer between memory 2552 and the computing device. In addition, the connector 2554 can be protected by a cover, such as, for example, a swivel cover 2559, which can be made to move between a locked position (see FIG. 139), in which the connector 2554 is closed, and an unlocked position (see FIG. 140), in which the connector 2554 is open to receive the corresponding connector 2556. In one example, a screw 2558 can be used to attach the swivel cover 2559 to the case 2502. In the present description, other means for a reversible coating can be connected 2556. In addition to the above, in some examples, connectors 2554 and 2556 may include key-type interaction in the lock, and connectors 2554 and 2556 may have, for example, unique complimentary geometric shapes that prevent the connector 2554 from receiving other connectors to prevent or at least restrict unauthorized access to data stored in memory 2552. In some examples, connector 2554 may be located within housing 2502, as shown in FIG. 141 to further restrict unauthorized access to data stored in memory 2552. In such circumstances, connector 2554 may be accessible by separating the first shell 2504 from the second shell 2506 of the case 2502. However, as described in more detail above, the shutdown mechanism 2512 may, upon breaking the case 2502 causes the power source 2500 to be rendered inoperative, which may further prevent attempts to open connector 2554 to gain access to the data stored in memory 2552.

As shown in FIG. 142, a power source 2500 may include a processor 2560, which may manage data stored in memory 2552. To protect such data from unauthorized access, processor 2560 may be associated with a break detection mechanism 2562. For example, processor 2560 may be connected to circuit 2514 and may be configured to detect a rupture of a rupture portion 2516. In one example, the rupture detection mechanism 2562 may include one or more sensors configured to detect a rupture in housing 2502. processor 2560 can be programmed after detecting a gap to prevent unauthorized access to the data stored in memory 2552, for example, by deleting or encoding the data.

In FIG. 143-145 shows a surgical instrument 2600. A surgical instrument 2600 is in many ways similar to a surgical instrument 10 (see FIG. 1) and / or a surgical instrument 2100 (see FIG. 146). For example, the surgical instrument 2600 may include a body assembly 2602, which is similar to the surgical instrument body node 2102 2100 and / or the surgical instrument body 12 10. In addition, the surgical instrument 2600 may include a power supply 2500 ′ that can be used to supply power to a surgical instrument 2600 and which is in many ways similar to other power supplies that are described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as, for example, sources Power 2500 (see. FIG. 134) and other power sources of the type which is described in more detail in the publication Zemlok '763, fully incorporated herein by reference. In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, the power source 2500 ’may include a charge level indicator 2660, which may be configured to provide the user with feedback on the charge level of the power source 2500’. Feedback can be provided, for example, in sound and / or light form. A 2500 ’power supply may include one or more LEDs. The processor 2560 may, for example, be programmed to monitor the LEDs to provide the user with feedback about the charge level of the 2500 ’source of power supply, which can be measured, for example, by means of a charge meter.

As shown in FIG. 143-145, the power supply 2500 ′ may include a first LED 2662 and a second LED 2664. A processor 2560 may be associated with LEDs 2662 and 2664 and may be programmed to illuminate both LEDs 2662 and 2664 after receiving a full charge signal from the charge meter power supply. In addition, the processor 2560 can be programmed to turn off both LEDs 2662 and 2664 after receiving a signal from the charge meter that the power supply is completely discharged. In addition, the processor 2560 can be programmed to illuminate only the first LED 2662, but not the second LED 2664, after receiving a signal from the charge meter that the power supply is sufficiently charged to perform only one full operation of the surgical instrument 2600. Other means are assumed in the present description to notify the user of the charge level of the 2500 power supply source.

In some embodiments, the implementation of the various components of the surgical instrument 10 can be, for example, reusable, and the various components can be replaceable. In addition, the surgical instrument 10 can be at least partially assembled, disassembled and / or reassembled. For example, the surgical instrument 10 can be at least partially disassembled and reassembled using, for example, reusable components and replaceable components. In addition, between surgical interventions, the surgical instrument 10 can be disassembled at least partially for cleaning, disinfection and / or treatment for reuse. After this, the surgical instrument 10 can, for example, be reassembled. As described in more detail herein, various elements, assemblies, and / or systems of the surgical instrument 10 can facilitate disassembly and assembly. For example, in FIG. 146-148, the surgical instrument 2100 is shown. The surgical instrument 2100 is in many ways similar to the surgical instrument 10 (see FIG. 1). For example, the surgical instrument 2100 may include a body assembly 2102 which is similar to the body 12 of the surgical instrument 10. In addition, the body assembly 2102 may include several detachable components 2103 that can be detachably attached to the housing part 2104, such such as working unit 2106. Other components of the body unit 2102 can be attached to the body part 2104 with the possibility of detachment. For example, the housing assembly 2102 may include a replaceable power supply 2108 that can be connected with the ability to detach to the handle part 2110 of the housing part 2104. The power supply 2108 is in many respects similar to other power supplies described in more detail in other sections of this document, , for example, power supply 200 (see FIG. 1).

As shown in FIG. 147, the body assembly 2102, or some or all of its components, may be reusable. In other words, the body assembly 2102 or some or all of its components may be used in a variety of surgical interventions, and between surgical interventions may require cleaning, disinfection and / or treatment to reuse the body assembly 2102. The ability to reversibly disassemble the body assembly 2102 or remove some or all of its components, such as, for example, work node 2106, can simplify the cleaning, disinfection and / or processing steps to reuse the body assembly 2012 and / or reduce the cost in a simple and reproducible way.

As shown in FIG. 147, the housing assembly 2102 can be disassembled after surgery, and the components of the disassembled housing assembly 2102, such as, for example, the housing part 2104, the working assembly 2106, and / or the power supply 2110, can be cleaned, disinfected and / or processed for reuse. separately or in combination with other components depending on the characteristics and the internal parts of each component. In some examples, the housing part 2104 may be disposable. In other words, the body assembly 2102 can be disassembled after surgery, and the body part 2104 can be replaced with a new body part 2104. However, the remaining components can be cleaned, disinfected and / or processed for reuse, after which they can be attached to the new body part 2104. that the other components of the chassis assembly 2102 can also be disposable and can be replaced with new similar components.

As shown in FIG. 146-148, body part 2104 may be configured to enable assembly and disassembly of body part 2102 in a simple, predictable, and reproducible manner. For example, the housing part 2104 may include a first protective casing section 2112 (see FIG. 147) and a second protective casing section 2114 (see FIG. 146), which can be attached with release possibility to the protective casing first section 2112. In one example, the guard housing portions 2112 and 2114 may include an interlock type engagement. Sections 2112 and 2114 of the protective casing can be made with the possibility of pairing with each other. In one example, the containment portion 2112 may include a plurality of female members 2116 (see FIG. 147), which may be cylindrical in shape and configured to receive corresponding input members (not shown) located on the containment portion 2114, meshing as a locking connection when jointly assembling sections 2112 and 2114 of a protective casing.

In addition to the above, work unit 2106 may be placed in the first portion of the protective casing 2112. As shown in FIG. 147, the second protective casing section 2114 can be removed to open the working assembly 2106 housed in the first protective casing section 2112 to allow the user to remove the operating assembly 2106 from the housing part 2104. The operating assembly 2106, as shown in FIG. 147, may include a motor 2118, which may generate rotational motions to actuate an end effector (eg, a cassette / stop portion of the loading unit 20 shown in FIG. 2). Engine 2118 is in many ways similar to other engines, described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as, for example, engine 100 (see FIG. 1). In addition, work unit 2106 may also include a transmission unit 2120, which may be functionally connected to the engine 2118 and which is in many respects similar to other transmission units, described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as, for example, gear unit 170 transmission (see FIG. 5). In addition, operating node 2106 may also include a trigger element assembly 2122, which can convert rotational motions created by the engine 2118 into axial movements that can be transmitted to the end effector through the trigger bar 2124. The trigger element assembly 2122 is similar in many respects to others drive units, described in more detail in other sections of this document, such as, for example, the node 82 trigger element.

As shown in FIG. 147 and 148, the first protective casing section 2112 may include a plurality of compartments configured to receive the work unit 2106 and located at a certain distance. For example, as shown in FIG. 147, the shield housing section 2112 may include a compartment 2126 for accommodating an engine, which may be located at a certain distance to accommodate the engine 2118. In some examples, the compartment 2126 for accommodating the engine may be configured to fit the engine 2118 in an established design so that ensure assembly accuracy. In addition, the engine housing compartment 2126 may include assembly instructions, which may, for example, be cast on the wall of the engine housing compartment 2126 to ensure correct assembly. For example, the side walls of the engine housing compartment 2126 may be configured to closely receive the engine 2118. In addition, the side walls may be made asymmetrically, at least in some respects, to receive the engine 2118 in only one position, i.e. in the correct position.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 147, the guard housing section 2112 may include a compartment 2128 for accommodating the transmission unit, which may be located at a certain distance to accommodate the transmission unit 2120. In addition, in some examples, the compartment 2128 for accommodating the transmission unit may be adapted to fit the transmission unit node 2120 in an installed design to ensure assembly accuracy. For example, the side walls of the transmission assembly compartment 2128 may be configured to receive a transmission assembly 2120 tightly. In addition, the side walls may be made asymmetrically, at least in some respects, to receive the transmission assembly 2120 in only one position, t . e. in the correct position. In addition, the compartment 2128 for accommodating the transmission unit may include assembly instructions, which may be, for example, cast on the wall of the compartment 2128 for accommodating the transmission unit to ensure correct assembly. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 147, the shield housing section 2112 may include a compartment 2130 for accommodating a trigger member assembly that may be located at a certain distance to accommodate the trigger member assembly 2122. In addition, in some examples, the compartment 2130 for accommodating the trigger element assembly may be configured to fit the trigger element assembly 2122 in an installed structure to ensure assembly accuracy. For example, the side walls of the compartment 2130 for accommodating the trigger element assembly may be configured to tightly receive the trigger element assembly 2122. In addition, the side walls can be made asymmetrically, at least in some respects, in order to receive the trigger element assembly 2122 in only one position, i.e. in the correct position. In addition, the compartment 2130 for placing the trigger element assembly may include assembly instructions, which may be, for example, cast on the wall of the compartment 2130 for placement of the trigger element assembly, to ensure correct assembly. The reader will understand that inside the protective casing section 2112, other components of the work unit 2106 with compartments can be offered for placement with a unique purpose. The reader will also understand that the electrical contacts for the components of work unit 2106 can also lie in the compartments of the protective casing section 2112 so that after proper assembly between the work unit 2106, other components of the case node 2102, such as, for example, the power supply 2108, and / or other components of the surgical instrument 2100 may be electrically connected.

In addition to the above, the work unit 2106 can be connected with the possibility of disconnection with the starting rod 2124, as shown in FIG. 147, which may allow the user to remove and reattach work unit 2106 as a single unit to surgical instrument 2100 to facilitate disassembly and reassembly of work unit 2106. In one example, as shown in FIG. 147, the trigger element assembly 2122 may include a hollow tubular distal section 2132, which may include a distal opening configured to receive and lock with the possibility of releasing the proximal section 2134 of the starting rod 2124, for example, in a lock-type engagement.

As shown in FIG. 147 and 148, other components of the chassis assembly 2102 may be placed in their dedicated compartments in the protective casing section 2112, similar to the operating node 2106. For example, the protective casing section 2112 may include a power supply compartment 2136 that may be located distance to accommodate power supply 2108. In addition, in some examples, the power source housing 2136 may be configured to fit the power supply 2108 in an installed design to ensure assembly accuracy. For example, the side walls of the power source compartment 2136 may be configured to tightly receive the power supply source 2108. In addition, the side walls can be made asymmetrically, at least in some respects, in order to receive the power supply 2108 in only one position, i.e. in the correct position. In addition, the power supply bay 2136 may include assembly instructions, which may be, for example, cast on the wall of the power bay 2136 to accommodate the power source to ensure proper assembly.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 147 and 148, certain mechanisms of the user input device, such as, for example, the start button 2138 and / or the closing switch 2140, can also be disconnected from the housing part 2104, which may include a compartment 2142 for accommodating the start button, which can be located a certain distance to accommodate the trigger button 2138, and / or a compartment 2144 for accommodating a closing switch, which may be located at a certain distance to accommodate the closing switch 2140. In addition, in some examples In this case, a compartment of the starting button 2142 can be adapted to fit the starting button 2138 in an installed design in order to ensure an accurate assembly. For example, the side walls of the compartment 2142 for accommodating the trigger button can be configured to tightly receive the trigger button 2138. In addition, the side walls can be made asymmetrically, at least in some respects, to accept the trigger button 2138 only in one position, t . e. in the correct position. Similarly, the compartment 2144 for accommodating the closing switch may be configured to fit the closing switch 2140 in the installed structure to ensure assembly accuracy. For example, the side walls of the closing switch compartment 2144 may be configured to receive the closing switch 2140 tightly. In addition, the side walls may be made asymmetrically, at least in some respects, to accept the closing switch 2140 in only one position, t . e. in the correct position. In addition, the compartment 2142 for placing the start button and / or the compartment 2144 for accommodating the closing switch may include assembly instructions that may be, for example, cast on the wall of the compartment 2142 to accommodate the start button and / or the compartment 2144 for accommodating the closing switch to ensure proper assembly.

As shown in FIG. 147 and 148, in addition to the accommodation compartments, the protective casing section 2112 may include a fastening mechanism (s) for attaching some or all of the detachable components 2103 of the body assembly 2102 in their respective compartments to provide that the detachable components 2103 remain housed in their respective compartments. Such fasteners may include fasteners that can be configured to move between an unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) and a locked configuration (see FIG. 147) to block the detachable components 2103 of chassis assembly 2102 in their respective compartments in section 2112 of the protective casing. The reader will understand that one or more fasteners can be used to attach one or more of the detachable components 2103 to the section 2112 of the protective casing. In addition, fasteners may also include security features that may prevent the fasteners from moving to the locked configuration in the event of improper assembly to ensure correct assembly of the detachable components 2103 of the body assembly 2102. As shown in the embodiment of FIG. 147, the working unit 2106 may be connected to the protective casing section 2112 by means of several fasteners, such as, for example, engine fastener 2148, transmission node fastener 2150, and / or trigger element fastener 2152. In some examples, as shown in FIG. 147, the power supply fastener 2154, the trigger button fastener 2156, and the closing switch fastener 2158 can be used to connect the power supply 2108, the trigger button 2138, and the closing switch 2140, respectively.

The fasteners can clamp the detachable components 2103 by moving from an unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) to a locked configuration (see FIG. 147). For example, the engine holding member 2148 may clamp the engine 2118 by moving from an unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) to a locked configuration (see FIG. 147). In some examples, some or all of the detachable components 2103 may include guides configured to receive fasteners as they move from an unlocked configuration to a locked configuration. Guides can be positioned in such a way that they can be combined to receive moving fasteners only when the detachable components 2103 are correctly positioned inside their respective compartments in the protective casing section 2112. For example, if the engine 2118 is not placed correctly in the engine housing compartment 2126, the engine fastener 2148 may not align properly with its guide, and when moving the engine fastener 2148 from an unlocked configuration to a locked configuration, the engine fastener 2148 may not enter the guide and, for example may be adjacent to the outer wall of the engine 2118. In some examples, the engine mounting element 2148 may be located so that it can prevent pairing ervogo guard portion 2112 with the second guard portion 2114, if the user tries to collect portions of the protective housing 2112 and 2114 in, while the motor attachment member 2148 is not in a locked configuration. This design can notify the user about the need to re-check the assembled components of the chassis assembly 2102 for proper assembly.

Similarly to the engine mounting element 2148, the transmission node mounting element 2150 can be received by a guide for the transmission node 2120 assigned to it, and the transmission node mounting element 2150 can be positioned so that it is aligned with its corresponding guide only when the transmission node 2120 is correctly positioned in compartment 2128 to accommodate the transmission unit. In addition, for example, the fastener element 2152 of the trigger element assembly can be adopted by the guide for the trigger element 2122 of the trigger element, and the fastening element 2152 of the trigger element assembly can be positioned so that it is aligned with its corresponding guide rail only when the trigger node 2122 the element is properly placed in compartment 2130 to accommodate the trigger element assembly. Also, similarly to the engine mounting element 2148, the transmission assembly mounting element 2150 and / or the starting element assembly mounting element 2152 can be arranged so that any of them can prevent the first section 2112 of the protective casing from engaging with the second section of the protective casing if the user tries to assemble sections the protective housing 2112 and 2114 at the same time as the transmission assembly fastening element 2150 and / or the trigger element assembly fastening 2152 are not in a locked configuration. As described above, some of the detachable components 2103 can be detached and then jointly attached to the protective casing element 2112 as an assembly, and they can be attached through a plurality of fasteners. For example, the work unit 2106 can be attached to the protective housing section 2112 by the engine fastening element 2148, the transmission assembly fastening element 2150 and / or the trigger element mounting fastener 2152, as shown in FIG. 147. Such a design can provide an additional level of insurance for proper assembly, since failure to properly assemble any one of the components of work unit 2106 can prevent the corresponding fastener from reaching the locked configuration, which can prevent the first section 2112 of the protective casing from engaging the second section of the protective casing if the user is attempting to assemble the enclosures 2112 and 2114 of the protective casing while at least one of the fasteners remains short them to a locked configuration.

As shown in FIG. 147 and 148, some or all of the fasteners may be rotatably attached to the first protective casing section 2112 and may be configured to move relative to the first protective casing section 2112 from an unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) to a locked configuration (see FIG. 147) and vice versa. In some examples, the second protective casing portion 2114 may include protruding fasteners (not shown) configured to receive the corresponding receiving member (not shown) inside the detachable components 2103 that are disposed in the first protective cover portion 2112 when the sections protective casing 2112 and 2114 are combined for pairing engagement during assembly of the body assembly 2102. The protruding fasteners can ensure that the detachable components 2103 remain attached to the first portion of the protective casing 2112. In addition, the protruding fasteners can prevent the first engaging section 2112 of the protective casing and the second protective casing section 2114 from pairing if the user tries to assemble sections of the protective casing 2112 and 2114 while the protruding fasteners are not properly aligned with their respective receiving elements for example, due to improper assembly of detachable components of the 2103, which may notify the user to re-verify assemblies of advanced modules. You disconnect components 2103 of chassis assembly 2102 for proper assembly. The reader will understand that the positions of the protruding fasteners and their respective receiving elements can be reversed so that the protruding fasteners can be made to project from the detachable components 2103 and be received into the corresponding receiving element in the second section 2114 of the protective casing . In any case, the protruding fasteners and their corresponding receiving elements can be attached with the possibility of release to each other, for example, in mesh-type engagement. In the present description, other mechanisms of engagement are contemplated.

In addition to the above, some or all of the detachable components 2103 may include cam surfaces configured to receive fasteners of the first guard section 2112 as they move from the unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) to the locked configuration (see FIG. 147). The cam surfaces may be located on the outer surface of some or all of the detachable components 2103 and may allow corresponding fasteners to apply pressure to the detachable components 2103 that are in the locked configuration. For example, engine 2118 may include a cam surface along its guide. When moving the engine fastener 2148 from the unlocked configuration (see FIG. 148) to the locked configuration (see FIG. 147), the engine fastener 2148 may move along the cam surface on the engine 2118, which may allow the engine fastener 2148 to apply increasing pressure engine 2118, and the maximum pressure, for example, is applied in a locked configuration. The pressure applied to the engine in 2118 may contribute to securing the engine in the compartment 2126 to accommodate the engine.

As described above, the end effector may include a trigger element that can be extended distally for stitching tissue with brackets and / or cutting fabric. As shown in FIG. 155, the end effector 11260 may comprise a first junction, including abutment 11262, and a second junction, including a cassette 11264 with brackets. The end effector 11260 may further comprise, first, a housing and / or a frame 11261 extending proximally from the stop 11262 and a cartridge 11264 with brackets, secondly, a starting element 11266 that can move relative to the housing 11261, the stop 11262 and the cartridge 11264. End effector 11260 may further comprise a hinge joint 11230, made with the possibility of ensuring the hinge rotation of the stop 11262 and cassette 11264 by means of the actuator 11268 hinge rotation. In the process of application, the end effector 11260 can be assembled on the trunk 11240 of a surgical instrument, for example, so that, first, the end effector body 11261 is connected to the trunk case 11241, configured to fix the end effector body 11261, and second, the starting the end effector element 11266 is connected with the actuator 11246 for the start-up of the barrel, made with the possibility of extending and retracting the end effector element 11266, and / or, thirdly, the actuator 11268 of the hinged rotation of the end effector link an actuator 11248 to pivoting barrel configured to extend and retract the actuator 11268 articulation of the end effector. During application, the trigger element 11266 can be extended distally to move the stop 11262 from the open position, in which the fabric can be located between the stop 11262 and the cartridge 11264, to the closed position, in which the stop 11262 presses the fabric to the cartridge 11264. In various circumstances, the starting element 11266 may include the first element of engagement, made with the possibility of entering into engagement with the first branch, and the second element of engagement, made with the possibility of entering into engagement with the second branch when pu extends 11266 kovogo element distally so that the stop can be pivoted 11262 to 11264 from the cartridge by the action brackets engaging elements. To reopen the end effector and allow the stop 11262 to return to its open position, it is necessary for the trigger element 11266 to be sufficiently retracted. In various circumstances, the trigger element 11266 can get stuck in the position of at least a partial start, and as a result, it is impossible to re-open the stop 11262, thus making it difficult to remove the surgical instrument from the surgical field.

As shown in FIG. 156-161, an end effector, such as, for example, an end effector 11360, may include a trigger element that can reopen the stop 11262 of the end effector 11360, even if the trigger element of the end effector 11360 is stuck in the at least partial position launch. More specifically, the end effector 11360 may include a trigger element 11366 containing separable portions 11366a and 11366b, which can be configured to provide relative movement between the stop 11262 and the cassette 11264 in various cases. As shown mainly in FIG. 157 and 158, the separable portions 11366a and 11366b can be held together by the locking element 11390 when the locking element 11390 is in the locked state, as shown in FIG. 158. Accordingly, when the locking element 11390 is in the unlocked state, the separable portions 11366a and 11366b can move relative to each other. The separable portion 11366a of the trigger element 11366 may comprise a first side portion 11363a, a second side portion 11367a, and a portion 11365a of the cutting member located between the side portions 11363a and 11367a. In different circumstances, the side portions 11363a and 11367a may be held with the cutting element portion 11365a by one or more pins, not shown in FIG. 157 and 158, passing through the holes 11396a formed in it. The separable portion 11366b of the trigger element 11366 may comprise a first side portion 11363b, a second side portion 11367b, and a portion 11365b of the cutting member located between the side portions 11363b and 11367b. In various circumstances, the side portions 11363b and 11367b may be held with the cutting element portion 11365b by means of at least one holding member, not shown in FIG. 157 and 158, with a leg 11396b passing from it. As will be understood by the reader, the aforementioned holding pins hold together the various components of the separable section 11363a, while the above-mentioned holding element holds together the various components of the separable section 11363b. As will also be understood by the reader, the locking element 11390, when it is in its locked position, holds together the separable portions 11363a and 11363b. In various cases, as shown predominantly in FIG. 158, the locking element 11390 may include a first locking element 11397a, adapted to engage with the first locking portion 11361a of the first section 11365a of the cutting member, and, in addition, the second locking element 11397b, which is capable of engaging with the second locking section 11361b of the second section 11365b of the cutting element. The first locking portion 11361a and the second locking portion 11361b may be configured to jointly and release the cutting element together with the releasing portions 11365a and 11365b. In various cases, the locking sections 11397a, 11397b can hold together the cutting element portions 11365a and 11365b so that the cutting surfaces 11395a and 11395b of the cutting element portions 11365a and 11365b respectively form a continuous or at least substantially continuous cutting surface. As shown in FIG. 158, the locking portions 11397a, 11397b of the locking element 11390 can be configured to jointly engage and hold the cutting element portions 11365a and 11365b of the keys 11361a and 11361b, respectively. In various cases, a recess 11398 may be formed between the locking portions 11397a, 11397b, configured to receive keys 11361a and 11361b when the locking element 11390 is in its locked position. By pulling the locking element 11390, the proximal locking portions 11397a and 11397b can release the keys 11361a and 11361b. At this point, the locking element 11390 may no longer hold together the cutting element portions 11365a and 11365b. Thus, in such circumstances, the separable portions 11366a and 11366b can move relative to each other. For example, the separable section 11366a can move with branches 11262 when re-opening the branches 11262, and accordingly, the separable section 11366b can remain with the cassette 11264. Given the above, the locking element 11390 can be pulled out proximally to free the separable sections 11366a and 11366b if for example, the trigger element 11366 is stuck in the at least partial start position.

As described above, the locking element 11390 can be pulled proximally to release the separable portions 11366a and 11366b of the trigger element 11366. As shown in FIG. 159, the locking element 11390 can be pulled proximally and / or ejected distally by means of the striker plate 11391. The locking bar 11391 may be located inside the end effector 11360 and may include the proximal end 11392 and the distal end 11393. The distal end 11393 of the locking plate 11391 may enter engagement with the locking element 11390. More specifically, in at least one embodiment, the distal end 11393 may include a protrusion extending therefrom, which may be positionably slidable i inside the elongated groove 11399 formed in the locking element 11390. In order to extend the locking element 11390 proximally, the locking bar 11391 can be pulled proximally until the protrusion comes into contact with the proximal end 11394 of the elongated groove 11399, and the locking bar 11391 can move transferred to the locking element 11390. Accordingly, the protrusion can be made with the possibility of contact with the distal end 11395 of the elongated groove 11399 to push the locking element 11390 distally. As will become clear to the reader, as shown in FIG. 156, the trigger element 11366 may include one or more longitudinal grooves 11369 formed therein, which may be adapted to allow the protrusion of the locking bar through and engagement with the locking element 11390, as described above.

In addition to the above, as shown mainly in FIG. 156 and 160, the proximal end 11392 of the striker plate 11391 may comprise an attachment section adapted to engage with an actuator 11348 for fixing the barrel 11340 of a surgical instrument. As shown mainly in FIG. 160, the locking actuator 11348 may include a distal end 11349, including a notch, which, for example, may be configured to receive a proximal end 11392 of the striker 11391. The locking actuator 11348 may additionally contain a proximal end 11347 pull proximally and / or push distally to move the fixation actuator 11348 and locking bar 11391 proximally and / or distally, respectively. During application, the proximal end 11392 of the striker plate 11391 can be assembled at the distal end 11349 of the fixation actuator 11348, when the end effector 11360 is assembled on the stem 11340.

As described above, the engine can be used to push and / or retract the trigger element to accommodate brackets from the end effector and / or cutting the tissue trapped inside the end effector. In various cases, the motor may include a rotating drive shaft, the rotation of which may be converted into translational movement and transferred to a starting element, such as, for example, a cutting element and / or a driving mechanism for brackets. In at least one such case, the rotating drive shaft may include a threaded portion that is connected by a threaded connection to a cuff including a threaded hole formed therein, and during use, the rotation of the cuff may be limited so that the rotation of the drive shaft extends cuff distally and / or pulls the cuff proximally, depending on the direction of rotation of the drive shaft. In some cases, the starter element may get stuck, and / or it may otherwise be acted upon by force or torque that exceeds the desired or specified maximum level of force or torque. As shown in FIG. 162-167, the engine assembly 12000 may include the engine 12010, the barrel 12020, and the slip clutch assembly 12030, wherein the slip clutch node 12030 may limit the force or torque that the engine 12010 can transmit to the barrel 12020. In various cases, as shown mainly in FIG. 162 and 163, the slip clutch assembly 12030 can transmit torque between the rotating output element 12012 of the engine drive 12010 and the barrel 12020. As shown in FIG. 165-167, the output element 12012 of the actuator may include a substantially circular section 12011 of the outer profile and a transition surface 12014, which in various cases may be flat or at least substantially flat. The outer profile of the drive output element 12012 may further include a first driving arm 12016 formed between the circular section 12011 of the profile and the flat surface 12014, and furthermore a second driving shoulder 12018 formed between the opposite end of the flat surface 12014 and the circular section 12011 of the profile.

As shown in FIG. 165-167, the slip clutch assembly 12030 may include a drive element 12034 biased into engagement with the output element 12012 of the drive biased element or spring 12036. The drive element 12034 may be at least partially located within a holding groove formed in the housing 12037 node 12030 clutch slip so that the movement of the drive element 12034 relative to the housing 12037 can be determined along the axis. As will become clear to the reader, the body of the slip clutch assembly housing 12037 can be mounted on the barrel 12020 so that the rotation of the housing 12037 and the barrel 12020 occurs synchronously. As will also be understood by the reader, at least under certain circumstances, the drive element 12034 may transmit rotational movement of the output drive element 12012 to the housing 12037. More specifically, when turning the drive output element 12012 in the first direction, as indicated by the arrow 12017, to extend the trigger element distally, the output element 12012 of the drive can be rotated relative to the drive element 12034 until the first drive arm 12016 comes into contact with the drive element 12034. As it becomes clear STUDIO first drive arm 12016 may remain in contact with the drive element 12034 as long as the biasing member 12036 is able to resist or at least sufficiently to resist radial movement of the drive member outwardly 12034. As long as the drive member 12034 is in contact with the first drive arm 12016, the engine 12010 can rotate the barrel 12020 in the direction in which the trigger member extends distally. In various cases, the motor 12010 may apply a torque to the drive output element 12012 that is large enough to displace the drive element 12034 radially outwardly so that the first drive arm 12016 of the drive output element 12012 slides under the action of the drive element 12034, resulting in the output element The 12012 actuator is rotated relative to the actuator 12034, the slip clutch housing 12037, and the barrel 12020. In other words, the actuator 12034 may be deflected and functionally released from the motor of Tell 12010 when applied to the output member 12012 actuator torque in excess of a predetermined value or the maximum torque. By reducing the torque applied to the drive output element 12012 below this specified or maximum torque value, the drive element 12034 can re-engage with the first drive arm 12016, as a result of which the trunk 12020 can be functionally re-engaged with the engine 12010 that the barrel 12020 is rotated by the output element 12012 of the engine drive 12010.

In addition to the above, by rotating the output element 12012 of the actuator in the second direction, as indicated by arrow 12019, to retract the trigger element, proximally the output element 12012 of the actuator can be rotated relative to the drive element 12034 until the second drive arm 12018 comes into contact with the drive element 12034. As will become clear to the reader, the second driving arm 12018 may remain in contact with the driving element 12034 as long as the displacing element 12036 is able to resist or at least in d Residual degree to resist radial movement of the drive element 12034 outward. As long as the drive element 12034 is in contact with the second drive arm 12018, the engine 12010 can rotate the barrel 12020 in a direction that causes the starting element to retract proximally. In various cases, motor 12010 may apply a torque to the drive output element 12012 that is large enough to displace the drive element 12034 radially outwardly so that the second drive arm 12018 of the drive output element 12012 slides under the action of the drive element 12034, resulting in the output element The 12012 actuator is rotated relative to the actuator 12034, the slip clutch housing 12037, and the barrel 12020. In other words, the actuator 12034 may be deflected and functionally released from the motor of Tell 12010 when applied to the output member 12012 actuator torque in excess of a predetermined value or the maximum torque. By reducing the torque applied to the drive output element 12012 below this specified or maximum torque value, the drive element 12034 can re-engage with the second driving arm 12018, as a result of which the barrel 12020 can be functionally re-engaged with the engine 12010 that the barrel 12020 is rotated by the output element 12012 of the engine drive 12010.

In various cases, in addition to the above, the first drive arm 12016 and the second drive arm 12018 may have the same configuration. In some cases, the first drive arm 12016 may be defined by the first radius of curvature, and the second drive arm 12018 may be defined by the second radius of curvature. In some cases, the first radius of curvature may be the same as the second radius of curvature. In such cases, the maximum (or sliding) torque that the engine 12010 can apply when rotating the output element 12012 of the drive in the first direction 12017, may be the same or essentially the same as the maximum (or sliding) torque that the engine 12010 can apply when turning the output element 12012 drive in the second direction 12019. In some cases, the first radius of curvature may differ from the second radius of curvature. In such cases, the maximum (or sliding) torque that the engine 12010 can apply when turning the output element 12012 of the drive in the first direction 12017 can differ from the maximum (or sliding) torque that the engine 12010 can apply when turning the output element 12012 of the drive the second direction 12019. In at least one such case, the first radius of curvature may be greater than the second radius of curvature, as a result, the maximum (or sliding) torque in the first direction 12017 may be less than the maximum (or sliding) torque in the second direction 12019. In other words, the engine 12010 may apply more torque to the barrel 12020 when the starting element is pulled in than when the starting element is extended. Such cases can be advantageous when it is desirable to retract the trigger element so that, for example, the end effector of a surgical instrument can be reopened and freed from tissue. In at least one case, the first radius of curvature may be less than the second radius of curvature, as a result, the maximum (or sliding) torque in the first direction 12017 may be greater than the maximum (or sliding) torque in the second direction 12019. In other words, the engine 12010 may apply more torque to the barrel 12020 when extending the trigger element than when retracting the trigger element.

In addition to the above, as shown mainly in FIG. 163 and 164, the biasing element 12036 may be elastically supported by a spring ring 12032 located within the annular channel 12031 formed in the slip clutch housing 12037. In such cases, the spring ring 12032 and the biasing element 12036 may act together to apply a radially inwardly bias force and / or resist the movement of the driving element 12034 radially outward. The spring ring 12032 in various cases may comprise an annular body including a first free end 12033 and a second free end 12034, wherein the annular body can elastically expand when the above described force is radially outwardly applied, and elastically contract when this force in a radially outward direction stops or decreases. In such cases, the first free end 12033 of the spring ring 12032 can move relative to the second free end 12034.

The devices described herein may be adapted for disposal after a single use, or they may be configured to be used a plurality of times. However, in any case, the device can be restored for re-use after at least one application. Recovery may include any combination of disassembly stages of the device, followed by cleaning or replacement of specific parts, and further assembly. In particular, the device can be disassembled and any number of specific parts or parts of the device can be selectively replaced or removed in any combination. After cleaning and / or replacing specific parts, the device can be assembled again for later use either in the restoration workshop or by the surgical team immediately before the surgery. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that a variety of disassembly, cleaning / replacing, and reassembly techniques can be used to restore the device. The use of such techniques, as well as the resulting reconstructed device, are included in the scope of this application.

Preferably, the subject matter described herein will be processed prior to surgery. First, after receiving a new or already used tool, it is cleaned if necessary. The instrument can then be sterilized. According to one method of sterilization, the instrument is placed in a sealed and sealed container, such as a plastic bag or a Tyvek bag (TYVEK). The container and the instrument are then placed in a radiation field that is capable of entering a container, such as gamma radiation, x-rays, or fast electrons. Radiation kills bacteria on the instrument and in the container. The sterilized instrument can then be stored in a sterile container. The sealed container keeps the instrument sterile until it is opened in a medical facility.

Any patent, publication or other description material, in whole or in part, which is indicated as incorporated herein by reference, is included in this document only to the extent that the included material does not contradict the existing definitions, provisions and other description material provided in this description. Thus, to the extent necessary, disclosure, as explicitly presented in this document, takes precedence over any contradictory material incorporated herein by reference. Any material or part thereof indicated as incorporated herein by reference, but contrary to existing definitions, provisions, or other description material presented herein, will be included in this document only to the extent that between the material included and the existing description material there are no contradictions.

Although the present invention is described as having examples of configurations, the present invention can be further modified within the spirit and scope of the description. Therefore, it is assumed that the present application covers all possible variations, methods of application or adaptation of the invention using its general principles. In addition, it is assumed that this application covers such deviations from the present description, which fall within the known or common practice in the field to which the present invention relates.

Claims (51)

1. Surgical instrument containing: housing; a rotating element supported on the mounting portion of the housing for rotation around it in the range of rotation; an elongated stem assembly that forms the longitudinal axis of the tool and is connected, when working with a rotating element, to rotate along with it around the longitudinal axis of the tool; power supply; Conductor management system containing: the conductor spool assembly, which includes the first end of the conductor attached to the housing mounting section, and the second end of the conductor attached to the rotating member for rotation along with it in the rotation range; the main conductor supported inside the housing and configured to transfer power from the power source to the conductor spool assembly; a stem conductor connected to the conductor spool assembly for transmitting power to the distal end of the elongated stem assembly; and means for limiting the range of rotation to a predetermined number of revolutions, comprising: section for limiting distal movement on a rotating element; a proximal displacement restriction portion on a rotating member, wherein the proximal displacement restriction portion is located in the axial direction at a distance of displacement from the distal displacement restriction portion; and limiter element secured on the rotating element for axial movement between the distal movement restriction section and the proximal movement restriction section and in threaded engagement with the mounting section of the housing so that as the rotating element rotates relative to the installation section, the restrictor element is provided in the first rotation direction in the movement in the axial direction to the area of restriction of the distal movement before contacting with it, so that In this way, to prevent further rotation of the rotating element in the first direction of rotation, and when the rotating element rotates relative to the mounting portion in the second direction of rotation, the limiter element is moved in the axial direction to the restriction area of the proximal movement before contacting it, thus preventing further rotation rotating element in the second direction of rotation. 2. The tool of claim 1, wherein the main conductor is connected to the first end of the conductor of the conductor spool assembly. 3. The tool of claim 2, wherein the main conductor is releasably connected to the first end of the conductor using a detachable connector assembly. 4. The tool of claim 1, further comprising a surgical end effector, functionally connected to the distal end of the elongated stem assembly and configured to receive power supply therefrom. 5. The tool of claim 1, wherein the length of movement has a value that facilitates the rotational movement of the rotating element at least one full turn around the mounting portion and not more than three full turns around the mounting portion in the first and second directions of rotation. 6. The tool of claim 1, wherein the means for limiting is configured to limit the range of rotation of the rotating member to the first number of revolutions, in the first direction of rotation, and to the second number of revolutions, in the second direction of rotation. 7. The tool according to claim 6, in which the first number of revolutions is equal to the second number of revolutions. 8. The tool of claim 7, wherein the limiter is configured to shift to a central position between the distal displacement restriction portion and the proximal displacement restriction portion through the displacement structure so that, when the rotational forces in the first and second direction are not applied to the rotating element, the displacement structure returns limiter to the center position. 9. Surgical instrument containing: housing including mounting section; a rotating element supported on the mounting portion of the housing for rotation around it; the node of the elongated shaft, which includes the distal end and connected when working with a rotating element for rotational movement with it relative to the body; surgical end effector associated with the distal end of the node of the elongated stem; power supply; Conductor management system containing: a winding conductor assembly comprising a first conductor end secured to the housing mounting portion and a second wire end secured to the rotating member to rotate with it; the main conductor, supported inside the housing and configured to transfer power from the power source to the conductor assembly with winding; a stem conductor connected to a winding conductor assembly for transmitting power to a surgical end effector; and means for limiting the range of rotation to a predetermined number of revolutions, comprising: section for limiting distal movement on a rotating element; a proximal displacement restriction portion on a rotating member, wherein the proximal displacement restriction portion is located in the axial direction at a distance of displacement from the distal displacement restriction portion; and limiter element secured on the rotating element for axial movement between the distal movement restriction section and the proximal movement restriction section and in threaded engagement with the mounting section of the housing so that as the rotating element rotates relative to the installation section, the restrictor element is provided in the first rotation direction in the movement in the axial direction to the area of restriction of the distal movement before contacting with it, so that In this way, to prevent further rotation of the rotating element in the first direction of rotation, and when the rotating element rotates relative to the mounting portion in the second direction of rotation, the limiter element is moved in the axial direction to the restriction area of the proximal movement before contacting it, thus preventing further rotation rotating element in the second direction of rotation. 10. The tool according to claim 9, in which the length of the movement has a value that facilitates the rotational movement of the rotating element at least one full turn around the mounting portion and not more than three turns around the mounting portion in the first and second directions of rotation. 11. The tool according to claim 9, wherein the means for limiting is configured to limit the range of rotation of the rotating member to the first number of revolutions in the first direction of rotation around the mounting portion and to the second number of revolutions in the second direction of rotation around the mounting portion. 12. The tool according to claim 11, in which the first number of revolutions is equal to the second number of revolutions. 13. The tool of claim 9, wherein the restrictor is configured to shift to a central position between the distal displacement restriction portion and the proximal displacement restriction portion through the displacement structure such that, when the rotational forces in any of the first and second elements are not applied directions of rotation, the bias design returns the limiter to the center position. 14. The tool of claim 9, wherein the power supply is supported by the housing. 15. The tool of claim 14, wherein the housing includes a handle, the power supply comprising at least one battery secured in the handle. 16. Surgical instrument containing: housing; a rotating element supported on the mounting portion of the housing; an elongated stem assembly that forms the longitudinal axis of the tool and is connected, when working with a rotating element, to rotate along with it around the longitudinal axis of the tool; power supply; means for transmitting power from the power source through a conductor passing through the elongated trunk assembly; means for limiting the amount of rotational movement of the rotating element around the mounting section by the range of rotational movement comprising at least one complete revolution and not more than three full turns around the mounting section, wherein the means for limiting the amount of rotational movement comprises section for limiting distal movement on a rotating element; a proximal displacement restriction portion on a rotating member, wherein the proximal displacement restriction portion is located in the axial direction at a distance of displacement from the distal displacement restriction portion; and limiter element secured on the rotating element for axial movement between the distal movement restriction section and the proximal movement restriction section and in threaded engagement with the mounting section of the housing so that as the rotating element rotates relative to the installation section, the restrictor element is provided in the first rotation direction in the movement in the axial direction to the area of restriction of the distal movement before contacting with it, so that In this way, to prevent further rotation of the rotating element in the first direction of rotation, and when the rotating element rotates relative to the mounting portion in the second direction of rotation, the limiter element is moved in the axial direction to the restriction area of the proximal movement before contacting it, thus preventing further rotation rotating element in the second direction of rotation. 17. The tool of claim 16, wherein the means for transmitting the power supply comprises a conductive wire.

Images